WO2007037449A1 - Ink cartridge, and system including ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus - Google Patents

Ink cartridge, and system including ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007037449A1
WO2007037449A1 PCT/JP2006/319616 JP2006319616W WO2007037449A1 WO 2007037449 A1 WO2007037449 A1 WO 2007037449A1 JP 2006319616 W JP2006319616 W JP 2006319616W WO 2007037449 A1 WO2007037449 A1 WO 2007037449A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ink
ink cartridge
supply
case
ambient air
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2006/319616
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2007037449A9 (en
Inventor
Shingo Hattori
Tomohiro Kanbe
Toyonori Sasaki
Original Assignee
Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=37744413&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=WO2007037449(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Priority claimed from JP2005284646A external-priority patent/JP4539517B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2006064867A external-priority patent/JP2007196650A/en
Priority claimed from JP2006081806A external-priority patent/JP4479684B2/en
Application filed by Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha filed Critical Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Publication of WO2007037449A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007037449A1/en
Publication of WO2007037449A9 publication Critical patent/WO2007037449A9/en
Priority to HK08106943.7A priority Critical patent/HK1116451A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17566Ink level or ink residue control
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17543Cartridge presence detection or type identification
    • B41J2/17546Cartridge presence detection or type identification electronically

Definitions

  • the present invention is related to an ink cartridge, more sp ink cartridge which restricts erroneous detection by a transmission due to ink scattered when the ink cartridge is mounted to or remov jet recording apparatus, and to a system including an ink cartridge recording apparatus Background Art
  • the ink cartridge has an ink outlet on a front surface with respect direction of the ink cartridge
  • the ink jet printer has an ink supply inserted to the mk outlet of the ink cartridge and a cartridge detecto below the ink supply needle
  • the cartridge detector detects that th is mounted to the ink jet printer
  • the ink supply needle is inserted to the ink o supply ink in the ink cartridge to the ink jet printer, and the cart contacts one surface of the ink cartridge and detects that the in mounted to the ink jet printer
  • an optical sensor using a photodiode and the like cartridge detector for example, an outer casing of the ink cartri transparent or semi transparent so as to detect that the ink cartridge the ink jet printer or detect an amount of residual ink in the ink cartr Disclosure of the Invention
  • the ink cartridge is mounted to and removed fr formed and at a position below the ink outlet it may not be accuratel the ink cartridge is mounted to the ink jet printer or the amount of re not be correctly detected, which causes erroneous detection
  • An ink cartridge is mounted horizontally to an ink jet record and the ink cartridge has an ink supplying part and an irradiated surface with respect to a mounting direction of the ink cartri supplying part has an opening where an extracting member enters part is positioned above the ink supplying part when the ink cartridge the ink jet printer and the irradiated part is positioned between the part and the light receiving part of the transmission optical sensor cartridge is mounted in the ink jet recording apparatus
  • the irradi pair of opposing surfaces which face the light emitting part and the part of the transmission optical sensor respectively and the pai surfaces extends substantially vertically when the ink cartridge is ink jet recording apparatus Therefore, even if ink is scattered from the ink supplying part or the extracting member and adheres to the i when the ink cartridge is mounted to or removed from the ink jet p adhering to the opposing surfaces is likely to move downwards by it This is because the opposing surfaces extend substantially verticall even if ink adheres to the opposing surfaces, the ink adher
  • the ink supplying part and the irradiated part are both pos front side of the ink cartridge This allows space saving con comfortable handling of the ink cartridge
  • the opening of the ink supplying part is positioned fart than the irradiated part
  • the irradiated part is form front surface of the ink cartridge than the opening of the ink s Therefore, the opening of the ink supplying part is positioned relative irradiated part This restricts that ink scattered from the openi supplying part adheres to the irradiated part
  • the irradiated part may have a front surface connectin scattered when the ink cartridge is mounted to or removed from the it is restricted that the scattered ink adheres to the opposing surface
  • the ink storing member including at least a part of ea supplying part and the irradiated part may be covered with the the front surface of the casing is provided with a first penetration op part of the ink supplying part extends to the outside and a seco opening in which the irradiated part is accommodated, since the irr provided in the casing, it is restricted that ink adheres to the opposin
  • a moving member which moves in response to a decrease i ink in the ink cartridge can be disposed withm an ink storing chambe the moving member may be disposed within the inner space of the i
  • the moving member moves as the ink amount amount of light received by the light receiving part of the trans sensor is changed Accordingly the amount of residual ink in t chamber is detected
  • the opposing surfaces of the irradiated part ar that the ink adhering to the inner surfaces of the opposing surfaces i downwards Therefore, the amount of residual ink in the ink storin be precisely detected according to the movement of the moving memb
  • the moving member may have a light blocking member, whic at one end of the moving member and disposed within the inne irradiated part a floating member which is positioned at another en member and moves according to the amount of residual ink in t chamber, and a support member, which is positioned between the sh and the floating member
  • the moving member may be a rotation m rotatable around the support member
  • a pair of protruding portions may be formed on the front s protrude outwardly from the front surface farther than the ink supp the atmosphere introducing part protrude
  • the ink supplying atmosphere introducing part are positioned between the pair of protr If the ink cartridge is dropped, the protruding portions strike the gro ink supplying part and the atmosphere introducing part do not stri Since the ink supplying part is a part which supplies ink ink may be the opening of the ink supplying part In this case, if the ink s directly strikes the ground ink may scatter from the ink supplying p the protruding portions restrict that ink is scattered from the ink s Accordingly, it is also restricted that ink adheres to the opposing s irradiated part Brief Description of Drawings
  • FlG 1 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the device of the present invention
  • FlG 2 is an angled diagram of the refill unit
  • FIG 3 is a side view showing the state in which the door of the refill opened
  • FlG 4 is a cross sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figu IV IV line cross sectional diagram of the protector m Figure 9(a) along th
  • FlG 10 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of cartridge
  • FlG 11 is an angled diagram showing the details of the black ink car
  • FlG 12 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the black ink cartridge
  • FlG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large cap cartridge
  • FlG 14 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is the ink reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink rese
  • FlG 15 is a diagram showing the supply path formation part, diagram showing a summary of the supply path formation pa of the frame part), (b) is a cross sectional diagram showing t formation part in Figure 15(a) along the XVb XVb line, (c) showing the state in which the amount of ink has been reduc diagram showing the completion of the ink supply
  • FlG 16 is a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part, angled diagram showing a summary of the ambient air path f
  • (b) is a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part i along the arrow XVIb perspective
  • (c) is a diagram showin air path formation part in Figure 16(a) along the arrow XVIc p
  • FlG 17 is a diagram showing the injection path formation part, diagram showing a summary of the injection path formation a cross sectional diagram of the injection path formation part i along the XVIIb XVIIb line
  • FlG 18 IS a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) showing a summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a showing one side of the front of the ink reservoir elemen cross sectional diagram of Figure 20(a) along the XXc XXc lin
  • FlG 21 is a diagram showing the details of the ink reservoir eleme
  • FlG 22 is an exploded diagram of the ink supply mechanism and t intake mechanism, where (a) is an exploded diagram of t mechanism and (b) is an exploded diagram of the ambi mechanism
  • FlG 23 is a diagram showing the supply cap where (a) is a diagra side of the supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surfac cap in Figure 23(a) along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) showing the planar surface of the supply cap (d) is a diagra bottom surface of the supply cap, and (e) is a cross sectional supply cap in Figure 23(c) along the XXIIIe XXIIIe line
  • FlG 24 is a diagram showing the supply joint, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply joint (b) is a diagram showing the planar supply joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of th and (d) is a cross sectional diagram of the supply joint in Fig the XXIVd XXIVd line
  • FlG 25 is a diagram showing the supply valve, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply valve, (b) is a diagram showing the side of th in Figure 25(a) along the arrow XXVb perspective, (c) is a dia the planar surface of the supply valve, (d) is a diagram showi surface of the supply valve and (e) is a cross sectional diagra valve in Figure 25(c) along the XXVe XXVe line
  • FlG 26 is a diagram showing the first supply spring, where (a) showing the side of the first supply spring, (b) is a diagra planar surface of the first supply spring, (c) is a diagram show 1
  • FlG 28 is a diagram showing the valve seat, where (a) is a diagra side of the valve seat, (b) is a diagram showing the planar valve seat, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the (d) is a cross sectional diagram of the valve seat in Figure 2 XXVIIId XXVIIId line
  • FlG 29 is a diagram showing the check valve, where (a) is a diagra side of the check valve, (b) is a diagram showing the planar check valve, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of t and (c) is a cross sectional diagram of the check valve in Fig the XXIXd XXIXd line
  • FlG 30 is a diagram showing the cover, where (a) is a diagram sho the cover, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the diagram showing the bottom surface of the cover and (d) is a diagram of the cover in Figure 30(b) along the XXXd XXXd lin
  • FlG 31 IS a diagram showing the ambient air cap, where (a) is a dia the side of the ambient air cap, (b) is a diagram showing t ambient air cap in Figure 3l(a) along the arrow XXXIb pers diagram showing the planar surface of the ambient air cap, ( showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cap, cross sectional diagram of the ambient air cap in Figure 3 XXXIe XXXIe line
  • FlG 32 is a diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) showing the side of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram show surface of the ambient air joint, (c) is a diagram showing the of the ambient air joint, and (d) is a cross sectional diagram air joint in Figure 32(b) along the XXXIId XXXIId line
  • FlG 33 is a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a dia diagram showing the welding surface of the film onto the fra is a diagram showing the welding process to weld the film part
  • FlG 37 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that after the film welding, where (a) is a diagram showing t process to attach the ink supply mechanism and the ambi mechanism onto the frame part, (b) is a diagram showing reducing process and (c) is a diagram showing the ink injectio
  • FlG 38 is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, diagram showing the process to sandwich the frame part by t is a diagram showing the welding process to weld the case
  • FlG 39 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that prior to shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagra process to attach the protective cap, and (b) is a diagram showi to package the ink cartridge using the packaging unit
  • FlG 40 is a diagram showing the method of attaching the ink ca multifunction device
  • FlG 41 is a diagram showing the state in which the ink cartri attached to the multifunction device
  • FlG 42 is a diagram showing the operation of the sensor arm corres amount of ink remaining within the ink reservoir chamber, w the state in which there is ink remaining and (b) shows the there is no ink remaining
  • FlG 43 is a diagram showing the operation theory of the diagrammatically
  • FlG 44 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the has been attached to the multifunction device 1 in the wrong o the ink cartridge, and (c) is an angled view of the ink cartridg
  • FlG 48 is a diagram showing the front of the case where (a) is a fr case that can store either the large capacity blank ink cartrid ink cartridge and the color ink cartridge, and (b) is a front v that can store the black ink cartridge and the color ink cartri
  • FlG 49 is a cross sectional diagram showing a summary of the cros case, where (a) is a cross sectional diagram showing a summ in Figure 48(a) along the XXXXIXa XXXXIXa line, cross sectional diagram showing a summary of the case in Fig the XXXXIXb XXXIXb line
  • FlG 50 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which eac has been attached withm the case
  • FlG 51 is a diagram showing the combination of the c diagrammatically
  • FlG 52 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit ac second example of embodiment where (a) is a diagram show the ink cartridge according to the second example of embodime diagram showing the cross section of the state in which the in been attached within the refill unit
  • FlG 53 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the third and fourth examples of embodiment, angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the third example of embodiment, and (b) is an a showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment
  • FlG 54 is an angled diagram showing the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment FlG 58 is a flowchart showing the ink cartridge attachment detecti is executed by the CPU
  • FlG 59 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the seventh example of embodiment
  • (b) diagram showing the external appearance of the ink cartridg the eighth example of embodiment FlG 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit
  • ac ninth example of embodiment FlG 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the tenth example of embodiment FlG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartrid the tenth example of embodiment
  • FlG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the ink
  • FlG 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to example of embodiment
  • FlG 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
  • FlG 66 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
  • FlG 67 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention
  • FIG. 1 is an oblique vie appearance of multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 used as a recording medium based on image data or document data computer Multifunction device 1 can also be connected to an external a digital camera (not illustrated in the figure) such that it recor outputted from the digital camera to recording paper Moreover, by us multifunction device 1 can communicate with a device of another p image data to the device of the other party Furthermore, multifunct equipped with slot part 23, which is described below, and by loading v recording media such as memory cards into this slot part 23, the de data such as image data recorded on the recording medium to recordi
  • printer part 11 is configured as an m device, and refill unit 13, which stores ink that is supplied to a recor illustrated in the figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is e base of the front surface of multifunction device 1 Refill unit 13 design and is configured such that ink cartridge 14 can be easily rep will be described in detail below
  • Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15 which function (Flatbed Scanner), and document cover 16, which is provided on the this document bed 15 (top of figure l)
  • Document cover 16 is automatic document feeder (ADF Auto Document Feeder, called “A 17, and it is attached to the back side of document bed 15 (back si using a hinge such that it can be freely opened and closed Theref cover 16 is opened and closed by rotating in the direction of arrow A document bed 15
  • document bed 15 constitutes a housing of multifunction device 1
  • document cover 16 constitut the top surface of multifunction device 1
  • Document bed 15 is equipped with a contact glass sheet (not illu figure) between the document bed and document cover 16 and it is configuration that is not equipped with ADF 17 may also be configuration, document cover 16 is opened by the user, and docume on the contact glass sheet
  • Printer part 11 is equipped with an image recording part that recording head (not illustrated in the figure), and this is configure recording device
  • Printer part 11 is equipped with refill unit 13 on t multifunction device 1 (front side of Figure l) and on the b multifunction device 1 (bottom side of Figure l)
  • refill unit 13 is configured such that it hold four ink cartridges 14, and black, yellow, magenta, and cyan stored in each of these ink cartridges 14
  • the ink of each color cartridges 14 is supplied to the recording head through ink tube 53 (s
  • opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes openin the end of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure l) is p front surface of refill unit 13 (front of Figure l) Opening/closin configured such that it can be freely rotated between a position in w re nil unit 13 through opening 21 and a position in which it closes o houses refill unit 13 by folding it over to the front (front direction in
  • Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifun and a paper feed tray (not illustrated in the figure) is positioned insi 22 (in Figure 1, the state in which the paper feed tray is disengaged After the recording paper that is sent from the paper feed tray is se side, it is sent to the top and finally fed to the front side, and image onto the recording paper while the recording paper is fed The reco then discharged to a paper ejection tray (not illustrated in the provided on the upper part of the paper feed tray inside opening 22 commands from the various operation keys 31 34 the control de commands from receiver 2 described above and controls the multifunction device 1 Further, in cases in which a device such computer is connected to multifunction device 1, the control devic operation of multifunction device 1 based on instructions sent fro computer in addition to the instructions from operation panel 30
  • FIG. 3 is a side view of the state in w refill unit 13 has been opened
  • Figure 4 is a cross sectional view o through line IV IV of Figure 2
  • Figure 5 is a cross sectional view of refill unit 13 thro Figure 2
  • the state in which ink cartridges 14 are installed is illu 6
  • is an exploded perspective view of door 41 of refill unit 13 Fi illustrate the state in which needle forming member 48 is removed
  • refill unit 13 is primarily equipped wit which ink cartridges 14 are inserted and removed, and door 41, whic to this case 40
  • Case 40 is formed into a roughly rectangular paralle whole, and, as illustrated in Figure 4, accommodating chambers 50 (that house and hold ink cartridges 14 are partitioned and formed on this embodiment, case 40 has four accommodating chambers 50, plate part 44 that is positioned such that it spans the space between part 43, and the mside of accommodating chambers 50 is further partition wall parts 47 (see Figure 4) for partitioning each accommod 50
  • the number of these partition wall parts 47 arranged is dete number of ink cartridges 14 housed in case 40, and the positions in arranged are determined by the thicknesses of ink cartridges 14 direction
  • partition walls 47 are formed provided from the top and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling Further, partition wall parts 47 do not need to completely accommodating chamber 50 so they may be of any shape as long protrudes to the inside from at least one of bottom plate part 42 or DC 44 and divides the space between adjacent
  • cutout part 40a opening opened is formed on the back side of case 40 (back right side of Figure forming member 48 is fitted into this cutout part 40a Needle member) that extracts the ink inside mk cartridges 14 is formed on member 48 based on the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in a chambers 50 of case 40
  • needle 49 extends along the direction o case 40 and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installatio the state in which needle forming member 48 is engaged with cu
  • ink supply part 120 see Figure 8
  • ink supp 500 see Figure 22
  • Needle 49 communicates with ink extr 52 that projects upward on the back side of case 40 (right side of Fig tube 53 is connected to this ink extraction opening 52
  • Ink tube 53 is c Figure 5
  • This protrusion protrusion that is fitted into case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 d (see Figure 8)
  • the upside down insertion of ink cartridge 14 is pre protrusion 55
  • a detailed description of this prevention of the backwa ink cartridge 14 is given below
  • a detailed description of the internal s cartridge 14 is also given below
  • Remaining ink detection sensor 57 On the back side of case 40, remaining ink detection sensor 57, wh height of the ink liquid level (remaining ink) inside ink cartridge between needle 49 and passage 54
  • This remaining ink detection transmissive optical sensor that has light emitting part 57a and light 57b, and it is provided according to the number of ink cartridges accommodating chambers 50
  • Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is position corresponding to detection part 140 (see Figure 8) of ink cart state in which ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accommodating cha is arranged in a position in which light emitting part 57a and light 57b can sandwich both sides of detection part 140 of ink cartridge 14 accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b))
  • Remaining ink detec is connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink sto cartridge 14 is constantly monitored by this control device
  • Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves case 40 Further ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm m A tension spring is attached between swing arm mechanism 44b an part 44, and swing arm mechanism 44b is always elastically biased i of door 41 (front left side of Figure 2, left side of Figures 3 5) Swing a 44b is configured such that the ends that project into case 41 (a chamber 50) engage with latch parts 217a and 227a (see Figure 8) o Door 41 opens and closes opening 45, and is provided on each o position of door 41 switches between a position in which it clos (blocked position) as with the 1 st , 3 rd and 4 th door 41 from the back in position in which it opens opening 45 (open position), as with the 2 n the back left in Figure 2, and opening 45 can thereby be opened an door 41 is in the blocked position, ink cartridge 14 is reliabl accommodating chamber 50, and when door 41 is in the open position 14 can be easily inserted into and removed from accommodating cha
  • Door 41 is equipped with door main body 60, pressing retaining m is provided on this door main body 60, door lock member 62 (lock ba (locks) door 41 to case 40, and lock release lever 63 that releases do fastened state
  • Door main body 60, pressing retaining member 61, doo 62, and lock release lever 63 are each molded using resins
  • door mam body 60 is roughly formed the shape of a long and thin rectangle
  • the external shape of door m formed according to the shape of opening 45 of case 40
  • Speci part 42a is formed on the front end of bottom plate part 42 of case 40 3 and 4), and rotating shaft part 64 is fitted into this bearing part 4 can rotate freely
  • door mam body 60 can close opening 45 or open opening 45 by folding over
  • Pullout member 65 which is formed as a unit with door mai provided on the bottom end of door main body 60 This pullout roughly formed into an L shape,' and it has extension part 65a and cu Extension part 65a is successively provided on the bottom end of door part 64 as a rotational center
  • outer wall surface 65c changes from a state in roughly perpendicularly (state illustrated in Figure 4) to a roughly h (state illustrated in Figure 3)
  • the length of extension part 65a of p 65 is set to a prescribed dimension, so when curved part 65b is rota surface 65c is slightly higher than installation surface 51 of case 40 parallel to installation surface 51
  • Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides i onto installation surface 51 inside accommodating chamber 50 in the door 41 is in the open position
  • pullout member 65 function a member for pulling ink cartridge 14 out of accommodating chamber a guiding member when inserting ink cartridge 14 into accommodati
  • pullout members 65 are provided on e body 60
  • pullout members 65 are configured such positioned opposite the width direction of door main body 60 an cartridge 14 by sandwiching it in the width direction Moreover, in th the spacing between each of the pullout members 65 is set to be sm width direction of ink cartridge 14
  • Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member protrudes to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodati which claw 61a is housed, is provided on door main body 60
  • Claw a part 60a is configured from a groove that extends in a direction t perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of door main body 60 (ve in Figure 6)
  • Claw 61a is fitted into claw accommodating part 60a s slide freely, so pressing retaining member 61 is supported such that When door 41 is in the blocked position, pressing retaining me contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 and is displaced t position side as it is relatively pressed by ink cartridge 14 (state Figure 4)
  • ink cartridge 14 receives the elastic force of through pressing retaining member 61 and is pressed against the b 40 (back side of the direction in which ink cartridge 14 is installed) cartridge 14 is held in a state in which it is positioned with respect to
  • pressing retaining member 61 is formed in flat plate, while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 6 makes contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when doo blocked position) is formed into a flat surface and a pair of projecti formed on this wall surface 61b Therefore, when door 41 is in the bl these strips 61c make contact with and press against the side cartridge 14
  • pressing retaining member 61 is configured such tha blocked position, it presses slightly downward from the center p vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 (vertical direction in Figure 4)
  • I pressing retaining member 61 is provided in a position in which it and presses downward from the center position in the vertical d cartridge 14 This is for the purpose of improving the operationally which the user operates door 41
  • pressing retaini when pressing retaini is positioned at or above the center position in the vertical direction o 14, the user operates door 41 by holding it in the vicinity of lock rele the distance between the part that is operated by the user and retaining member 61 becomes small Therefore the force induced by of pressing retaining member 61 becomes large, and a force that is l operate door 41 therefore becomes necessary
  • slightly below the center position in the vertical d cartridge 14 means that the center of the vertical direction of pres member 61 is positioned even lower than the center in the vertical cartridge 14,
  • the e pressing retaining member 61 of this embodiment is set such that it the elastic force of the valve mechanisms of ink supply part 120 a intake part 130
  • the ink inside ink cartridge 14 is reliabl ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink cartridge 14
  • Moreo part 120 is on the bottom end and ambient air intake part 130 is on the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in accommodating pressing retaining member 61 presses against a
  • Door lock member 62 is supported such that it can advance and vertical direction with respect to door main body 60 (vertical directio Slide rail 60b extends in the vertical direction on the top end of door Slide groove 62d which extends in the vertical direction, is provided part 62a of door lock member 62 Slide rail 60b of door main body 60 i this slide groove 62d, and door lock member 62 is configured such th slide up and down
  • Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key pa shaft part 62a
  • claw accommodating part 60c provided on door main bod accommodating part 60c is configured from a groove that extend prescribed length in the vertical direction Therefore when door lo slides upward or downward claw 62e makes contact with the inside claw accommodating part 60c, and the sliding of door lock member 62 direction is thus restricted
  • door lock member 62 The sliding range of door lock member 62 is encompassed as a result o the length of the groove that constitutes claw accommodating prescribed dimension
  • door lock member 62 slides upward door main body 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the top edge of t surface of claw accommodating part 60c
  • door lock member 62 is in which it projects upward from the upper end of door main body 60 member 62 slides downward with respect to door main body 60 and cl contact with the bottom edge of the inside wall surface of claw accom 60c
  • door lock member 62 is in the position in which it retreats to the main body 60
  • the position at which door loc makes contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw a slopes downward Therefore, when door 41 changes from the open blocked position, the top surface of door lock member 62 makes conta edge of opening 45 of case 40, and when door 41 is rotated towar position, door lock member 62 retreats to the inside of door main b relatively pressed against the top edge of opening 45 When door 41 t changes to the blocked position, door lock member
  • door lock member 62 is in a state fitted into lock member fitting part 46 (see Figures 2 and 5), which the top edge of opening 45 of case 40 Door lock member 62 is elastica that it always projects from door main body 60 due to coil spring 67, inside lock member fitting part 46 but the position of door lock me intermediate position such that it retreats slightly more to the retr side than the projecting side Door lock member 62 is always elas against lock member fitting part 46 when it is in the intermediate p lock member 62 never easily deviates from lock member fitting part
  • Lock release lever 63 is formed into the shape of a rectangular attached to the top of the outside of door mam body 60 in a state fastened to case 40
  • Door main body 60 is equipped with accommod which houses lock release lever 63
  • This accommodating part 6Od concave part that is provided on door main body 60 This will be de and when lock release lever 63 changes positions, lock release lever 6 accommodating part 6Od
  • Supporting pin 63a is provided on the bottom end of lock release l same time, pin support hole 6Oe, into which supporting pin 63a is fitt on door main body 60 Because supporting pin 63a is fitted into this pi 6Oe, lock release lever 63 is configured such that it can rotate free release lever 63 is inclined at approximately 45° is defined as the "ne while the position of lock release lever 63 when it is folded over rough is defined as the "folded position"
  • lock release lever 63 The bottom end of lock release lever 63 is interlocking cam 63b, a cam 63b is for sliding door lock member 62 up and down when the release lever 63 changes Because interlocking cam 63b is provid release lever 63 is rotated from the housed position through the ne and to the folded position, door lock member 62 slides from the proj through the intermediate position, and to the retreated position Put around, when door lock member 62 is in the projected position, lock r is placed in the housed position and door 41 is closed, and in the stat lock member 62 makes contact with lock member fitting part 46 o release lever 63 can be freely displaced between the housed position a position At this time, the central position of lock release lever 63 is s always moves to the neutral position due to its own weight Becau lever 63 arrives m the neutral position due to its own weight, it improve the operationahty into the folded position
  • lock release lever 63 will Interlocking cam 63b of lock release lever 63 makes contact with s door lock member 62 In the state in which door 41 is closed (state Figure 4) lock release lever 63 attempts to further rotate door lo through interlocking cam 63b in a direction pressing downward How member 62 is always elastically biased upward by coil spring 67 member 62 is not displaced by the action of the weight of lock release and door lock member 62 is maintained in the intermediate position
  • lock release lever 63 when lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for exam in which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates an Door lock member 62 constantly receives the elastic force of coil the rotational force that acts upon lock release lever 63 disappears - if the user releases his or her hand from lock release lever 63 - door l arrives in a position in which it projects most from door main bod release lever 63 is forcibly displaced to the housed position In othe door 41 is in the open position, lock release lever 63 is in the positio almost completely housed mside door main body 60 Therefore, whe cartridge 14, because lock lever 92 is almost completely housed in unit 60, rotating is possible with rotating shaft part 64 as the cente the point that door 41 is nearly horizontal, so the user can easi cartridge 14 Moreover the two strips 61c that are provided on wall pressing retaining member 61 also operate as guides when housing i inside accommodating chamber 50 in cooperation with a guide part b parts 65b In other words, when ink cartridge
  • Ink cartridges 14 that are used in this embodiment will be reference to Figures 7 to 13 Ink cartridges 14 are for the purpose of advance, and cyan, magenta, yellow and black colored ink is stor cartridge 14
  • each ink ca cartridge 14 that stores black ink is formed such that it is slightly th ink cartridges 14 that store the other colors of ink
  • t black ink is generally the highest and it is expended in large quantiti black ink consists of pigmented inks
  • colored inks consist of when black ink is mixed with colored ink, large quantities of colore expended for the recovery process Therefore, the external shape of t formed into a large shape such that colored ink and black ink c confirmed
  • the structures of ink cartridges 14 that store c all formed into the same shapes
  • Figure 7 is an oblique view showin appearance of a colored ink cartridge 14
  • Figure 8 is an exploded obli colored ink cartridge 14
  • Figure 9 is a diagram showing protector 30 top surface view of protector 300 from the perspective of IXa in Figur a cross sectional view of protector 300 through line IXb IXb in Figu following description
  • the X direction indicates the longitudinal di cartridge 14 (case 200 ink reservoir element 100) the Y direction height direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir element (see Figure 8), and protector 300, which is attached to this case 200 a reservoir element 100 when ink cartridge 14 is fed
  • As is clear from 200 is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped that contains a surfaces 210a and 220a that oppose one another (cases 1200 and below are the same)
  • ink reservoir element protector 300, and all of the members contained in ink cartridge 14 d are formed from resin materials and do not contain metal materials, burned at the time of disposal
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily frame part 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores i and reservoir space including mk reservoir chamber 111), ink su which supplies ink stored in this frame part 110 to multifunction Figure l), ambient air intake part 130, which introduces ambient part 110, detection part 140 (irradiated part) which is provided in the amount of remaining ink stored inside frame part 110, ink dispe which dispenses ink into frame part 110, and film 160, which is welde of frame part 110 (both top and bottom surfaces in Figure 8) in order reservoir chamber on frame part 110 Descriptions of frame part 1 part 120 ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140 ink dispe and film 160 and the manufacturing process for ink reservoir eleme given below
  • Case 200 comprises two case elements 210 and 220 that sandwic element 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8, Z d case member 210 is a member that covers the bottom side surface o element 100 in Figure 8, and second case element 220 is a member t top side surface of ink reservoir element 100 in Figure 8 First an become small, so it would be possible to reduce the damage of case 20
  • First case member 210 comprises a plate shaped part that forms 210a and vertical wall parts 210b 21Oe that are provided in roug directions (vertical directions and Z direction in Figure 8) from t portions of the four sides of this plate shaped part Regarding vert 21Od 21Oe, the vertical wall that forms the protector 300 side of firs
  • 210 is 210b, the vertical wall that is placed opposite this vertical wa 210c, and the vertical walls that are respectively connected to vert 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe (the right side vertical wall part 21Od and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical wall p
  • Case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing i 120 and ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 vertical wall part 210b of first case member 210
  • Case cutout parts 2 formed into roughly semicircular shapes from the edges of vertical and case cutout part 211 on the right front side of Figure 8 is a cutout to ink supply part 120, while case cutout part 212 on the left back sid a cutout corresponding to ambient air intake part 130 Rectangular c 213, which is cut out into a rectangular shape, is formed between ca
  • case projecting parts 214a and 214b which slopes in the direction of case cutout parts 211 to 213 (direction of th case member 210) towards the edge from the portion that connects surface of vertical wall part 21Od of the case member 210 (protector left front direction in Figure 8)
  • case 214a is on the bottom side
  • ink cartridge 14 is smoothly led to the prescribed instal due to its slope
  • case projecting part 214a case projecting cutout part 214al, into a rectangular shape, is formed on the inside surface that forms t cutout parts 211 to 213
  • case projecting part 214b Case projecti 214bl which is also cut out into a rectangular shape, is also forme surface that forms the side of case cutout parts 211 to 213
  • cutout parts 214al and 214bl are provided in order to preven desorption of protector 300 in the state in which protector 300 is at 200, and protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 300, which wi below, are fitted into these parts (see Figure 9)
  • case fitting groove 214b2 which is used as a fitting part i protector fitting part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) described b on case projecting part 214b
  • This case fitting groove 214b2 is fo portion of vertical wall part 21Oe from the edge of case projecting par the protector 300 side
  • rod member 215a which protrudes in the direction member 220 (Z direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Od on part 120 side (right front side of Figure 8) and determines the p reservoir element 100 sealed inside case 200, and rod members 2 orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Z direction in Figure 8) edge portions of the four sides of this plate shaped part Regardin parts 220b to 22Oe, the vertical wall that forms the protector 300 side member 220 is 220b, the vertical wall that is placed opposite this ve 220b is 220c and the vertical walls that are respectively connected t parts 220c and 220b are vertical wall parts 22Od and 22Oe (the right s is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical wall
  • Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure th symmetrical to first case member 210
  • first case member 2 cutout parts 221 to 223 are formed on vertical wall part 220b, and 221a connected to case cutout part 221 and contact groove 222a con cutout part 222 are also formed
  • Case cutout parts 221 and 222 are f same shapes as case cutout parts 211 and 212 of first case membe semicircular shapes), and case cutout part 223 is formed into the case cutout part 213 of first case member 210 (roughly rectangular sh case projecting parts 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of cas
  • case projecting part 224a has sloping surface 224a2 the direction of case cutout parts 221 to 223 towards the edge from t connects to the outside surface of vertical wall part 21Od of second ca Case projecting cutout part 224a 1 (not illustrated in the figure) is f projecting part 224a, and case projecting cutout part 224b 1 and case 224b2 are formed on case projecting part 224b across a portion of ver 22Oe from the edge of case projecting part 224b
  • second case mem hole parts 225a to 225c (not illustrated in the figure) having holes i members 215a 215c fit after passing through in the direction of firs 210 (Z direction) corresponding to the positions at which rod member of first case member 210 are formed sides in Figure 8, both sides in the Z direction) by case cutout holes 2 the side wall of detection part 140
  • a protrusion (“first proj "other projecting part” that contributes to the prevention of ink co refill unit 13, the prevention of the
  • first case member 210 a member 220 do not only have the same overall external appearance formed such that details such as case projecting parts 214a 214b, 2 and case cutout parts 211 to 213 and 221 to 223 also have the Therefore, when first case member 210 and second case me members 210 and 220 First and second case members 210 and 220 these step portions, and ink reservoir element 110 is fastened Regarding these step portions, the step portions on the side of ink s (right front side of Figure 8) are first case welded parts 216 and 22 portions on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left back side i second case welded parts 217 and 227
  • longitudinal direction B of first a members 210 and 220 (direction parallel to the X direction) longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction o element 100, and the longitudinal direction of case 200
  • First and second case welded parts 226 and 227 of second c described First case welded part 226 is connected to case projectin the same plane, and on the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, part 226a, which is formed into a concave shape in the direction o second case member 220, and engagement part 226b that engage member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when ink cartridge 14 is remo unit 13 (see Figure l)
  • Concave part 226a is a region for securing range when pullout member 65 rotates
  • Case welded part 227 has la which is formed into a concave shape in roughly intermediat longitudinal direction B of second case member 220, and this latch part that engages with swing arm mechanism 44b (see Figure 2) i which it is installed in refill unit 13
  • engagement part 216b (not illustrated in t latch part 217a (not illustrated in the figure) which are formed wi same shapes as concave part 226a, engagement part 226b, and latc second case member 220, are also formed on first case member 210 in a location corresponding to the side of ambient air intake part 130 in Figure 8) on the bottom surface This is because valve open operating ambient air valve 720 (see Figure 33) projects outward fro intake part 130, and protector through hole 310 is formed in order valve open part 721a
  • first protector fit which is fitted into the fitting groove formed by case fitting groo 224b2 (see Figure 8) is formed in the vicinity of the end of the si through hole 310 of protector 300 (left side in Figure 9(a))
  • Second p part 330a which is fitted into the through hole formed by case pr parts 214al and 224a 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protector 300 t formed in the vicinity of the end of the opposite side as the side protector fitting part 320 is formed (right side in Figure 9(a)), and se fitting part 330b, which is fitted into the through hole formed by c cutout holes 214bl and 224b 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protector 300 provided between first protector fitting part 320 and protector throug
  • protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b whi inserted into the through holes formed by case Gutout parts 213 an side wall of detection part 140 (see Figure 8), are formed in roughl positions in longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (Y direction in Fi Protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b are connected to b formed parallel to longitudinal direction C (top and bottom side walls and they are formed such that they project upward (X direction on t the page in Figure 9(a) and on the side of ink reservoir element 10 Multiple ribs are formed from the bottom surface of protector 300, maintain the strength of protector 300
  • First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends wall of protector 300 from a roughly intermediate position in direction of first protector fitting part 320 (upward in Figure 9(b)> X they have steps
  • protector vertical wall 321 and the t vertical wall 322 are inserted into the fitting groove
  • first p part 320 is inserted into the fitting groove, it is inserted as it is res ends of protector vertical wall 321, which extends in the Z direction longitudinal direction C (Y direction), and the end of protector verti longitudinal direction C
  • first protector fitting part 320 i roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by case fitting and 224b2 (see Figure 8)
  • the attachment of protector 300 takes time if protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the the position of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot b
  • protector vertical 322 at one surface (flat surface of protector vertical wall 321) and fo of both sides of protector vertical wall 321 and two ends of protecto 322) the installation properties of protector 300 are improved, installation can be prevented
  • protruding parts 330al and 330bl, away from one another are formed on the edges of second protecto 330a and 330b in the direction in which second protector fitting p 330b mutually separate (edges on the top side of Figure 9(b)), and sh and 330b2, which are formed into roughly cylindrical shapes, are direction of the bottom surface of protector 300 from these edges Figure 9(b))
  • Shaft parts 330a2 and 330b2 have elasticity because p formed from a resin material, and protector 300 is attached and rem constitutes case 1200, is identical to second case member 220 for co first case member 1210, which constitutes case 1200, is formed s thicker (the length in the Z direction is large) than first case member ink
  • Ink reservoir element 100 has sufficient capacity to store bla configured with the same shape as colored ink reservoir element 10 same parts
  • protector 1300 is formed corresponding to case formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z direction) 300 Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with
  • first case member 1210 comprises part that forms largest surface 1210a and vertical wall parts 1210b are provided in roughly orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Figure 11) from the outer edge portions of the four sides of this plat Regarding vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe, the vertical wall t protector 1300 side of first case member 1210 is 1210b, the vertic placed opposite this vertical wall part 1210b is 1210c, and the vertical respectively connected to vertical wall parts 1210c and 1210b are vert 121Od and 121Oe (the right side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121 side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121Od) Black ink cartridge 14 that the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe are the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of first cas for colored ink, and the thickness of ink cartridge 14 is accordingly in
  • case cutout parts 1211 and 12 As with first case member 210, case cutout parts 1211 and 12 Further, rib 1218 is formed an roughly the entire inside surfa member 1210 (roughly the entire largest surface 1210a) This rib 1 the Z direction towards the side of ink reservoir element 100 to the external profile of first case member 1210 is enlarged with respec member 210 (difference in heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 21 member 210 and vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe of first case Because this rib 1218 is provided, the space (gap) formed betwee element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled It is therefore possible t strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
  • first case member 12 case member 220 m the vertical direction (Z direction) differ, so ink s ambient air supply part 130, and detection part 140 are positione shifted from the center position in the vertical direction (biased positi
  • Figure 12 is an oblique view that shows the exter of large capacity black ink cartridge 14
  • Figure 13 is an exploded o large capacity black ink cartridge 14 case member 1210 for black ink is simply removed
  • ink res 2100 is simply thickened such that the capacity increases with res and black ink reservoir element 100 Therefore, detailed d large capacity black ink cartridge 14 will be omitted here
  • the refe 2000 is added to the reference numerals attached to colored ink car thicknesses of first case member 2210 and second case member 2220 direction (Z direction) are roughly equivalent, so ink supply part 212 supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 are positioned in the cen the vertical direction
  • refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 is configured equipped with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that ho cartridges 14 and a single accommodating chamber 50 that selectivel ink cartridge 14 and large capacity black ink cartridge 14 (the inne accommodating chamber 50 has a sized corresponding to large cap cartridge 14)
  • the inne accommodating chamber 50 has a sized corresponding to large cap cartridge 14
  • ink reservoir element 100 will be described with reference Figure 14 is a diagram that shows ink reservoir element 100, and Fi front view of ink reservoir element 100, while Figure 14(b) is a ba reservoir element 100
  • the state of ink reservoir element 100 illustr 14 is the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunctio
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equip part 110, ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, detectio dispensing part 150, and film 160
  • ink reservoir el configured roughly as a flat hexahedron
  • the pair of surfaces that largest area of this hexahedron is the front surface side and the back ink reservoir element 100 illustrated in Figure 14, and it is co approximately six surfaces with the side surfaces (side walls) posi directions that connect this front surface side and the back surface si surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 the pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when loaded
  • film 160 is welded to both the front surface side and the ba of frame part 110 so the thickness
  • frame part 110 will be described in detail Frame manufactured by injection molding using a resin material and it ha because it is formed to be translucent (or transparent) This is becaus below, light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a of remainin sensor 57 positioned on both sides of detection part 140 is trans receiving part 57b in order to detect the amount of remaining ink i element 100
  • Outer circumference welded part 400a is a vertical wall th the inner space of frame part 100 (space on the side of first chamb circumference welded parts 411a to 417b, which are provided on th outer circumference welded part 400b, are formed on the back surfac part 110
  • Outer circumference welded part 400b is a wall demarcati space of frame 100
  • Outer circumference welded part 400b is a ver demarcates the inner space of frame part 100 (space on the side of s 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111)
  • outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b reservoir chamber 111 in which ink is stored
  • the region on the fro illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir cha the region on the back surface side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is se 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111
  • outer circumference we illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first opening 112a of frame part 1 circumference welded part 400b illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second o frame part 110
  • Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 4 14(a) and 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 an stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside ambient air c passage forming part 430 (see Figure 14(a)), which communicates wi intake part 130 and introduces ambient air into ink reservoir plate shaped link forming part 440 (see Figures 14(a) and 14(b)), whi roughly the center of frame part 110 (or ink reservoir chamber 111) an vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 to the vicinity of ink dispensin these virtual planes
  • This link forming part 440 will be described in process
  • Ambient air passage forming part 430 is formed such that only on the front surface side of frame part 110 (side of first cham reservoir chamber 111), and it is roughly partitioned by plate pa extends parallel to these planes between a portion of outer circum part 400a and inner circumference welded part 412a and virtual pl
  • This ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 will b detail in a later process
  • thin plate shap parts are formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Fi bottom part of Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top 14(a) and top part of Figure 14(b)), and through holes 460a to 460c, members 215a to 215c (see Figure 8) of first case member 210 descr inserted are formed on these protruding parts
  • Inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a will be reference to Figure 14(a) Inner circumference welded parts 411a to inner circumference welded part 411a, which is provided on supply part 420, inner circumference welded part 412a which is provided o left/right direction in Figure 14(a)) Inner circumference welded part side wall (vertical wall) of ambient air connection passage 433 described below in ambient air communicating passage forming p consists of a downward sloping vertical wall that slopes in a intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (X di circumference welded part 413a is provided in the vicinity of ambi part 130, and it consists of a downward sloping vertical wall th direction that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame p vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall in a direction t orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (vertical dire 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are roughly T- circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward fa shape, and
  • inner circumference wel to 417b inner circumference welded part 411b and inner circumf parts 413b to 417b are formed with roughly the same shapes as inner welded part 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to above and in positions corresponding to those of inner circumferen 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 417a
  • a circumference welded part 412b is formed with a different shape an position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a
  • Moreo surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are po same virtual plane as that of the welded surface part of outer circum part 400b, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual pla
  • Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumf part 412bl, which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer welded part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitu B of frame part 110 (Y direction), and inner circumference welded par likewise consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumf part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal frame part 110]
  • Inner circumference welded part 412b 1 and inner welded part 412b2 are provided from plate part 438, which demarcat multiple units) so they efficiently reduce the inhibition of i suppressing the generation of slack in film 160
  • inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 41 equipped in a spread out orientation (scattered in multiple units), which case 200 is formed from a flexible resin material it is possible deformation with inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a an even if the case deforms on the side of ink reservoir element 100 A possible to prevent the damage of the case and the damage of film outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b and inner circumf parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b are formed with vertical provided on the front surface side or the back surface side, so extr dies are not required when frame part 110 is to be injection molded possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of ink cartridge 14
  • Figure 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420 Fi diagram that shows the outline of supply path forming part 420 (d back surface side of frame part 110)
  • Figure 15(b) is a diagram cross sectional view of supply path forming part 420 through lin Figure 15(a)
  • Figure 15(c) is a diagram that shows the state in which remaining ink has decreased
  • Figure 15(d) is a diagram that sho which the supply of ink has been completed
  • supply path forming part 42 equipped with first supply communicating hole 421, which communi supply part 120, supply partition wall 422, which is formed i triangular frame when viewed from the direction perpendicular t Figure 15(a) such that it encloses this first supply communicating part 427, which covers the region on the inside of supply partition sandwiching part 425, which is provided on the free end of plate pa sensor arm 470 ("displacement member", see Figure 19) that is rotating member (described below), and inner circumference wel which is provided in the direction of detection part 140 (see Figure 1 arm sandwiching part 425 Moreover, film 160 is welded to supply 422, and its welded surface part is positioned on the same virtua welded surface part of outer circumference welded part 400b (virtua space enclosed by supply partition wall 422 and plate part 427 chamber 426, which temporarily stores the ink that is supplied to i 120, and the space formed by supply concave part 424 and plate part part space 424a As illustrated in Figure 14(b
  • supply partition wall 422 is for when film 160 is to be welded, it separates the inside of frame ink supply part 120, will be described with reference to Figures 15(c illustrated in Figure 15(c), when liquid surface I of ink that is store 110 is higher than supply concave part 424, the ink is supplied to i 120 through the ink flow path indicated by arrow D in Figure 15(c recessed space 424a is filled with ink, so the inside of ink supply ch is enclosed by supply partition wall 422 is also filled with ink
  • ink fills the inside of ink supply c even if liquid surface I of the ink drops below first supply communic the ink can be supplied to ink supply part 120 through communicating hole 423
  • ink supply part cylindrically shaped as illustrated in Figure 8, and, as described bel ink supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670 are housed insi element 116, while shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) i first
  • Debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave is because the difference of distance t2 is provided between communicating hole 423 and the bottom part side wall of supply co
  • ambient air communicating passag 430 is primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that com ambient air intake part 130, second ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that com ink reservoir chamber 111, and ambient air connection passag communicates with first ambient air communicating chamber 43 ambient air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first surface film 160 is welded (left front side of Figure 16, first surface 437a is a contained in virtual plane R)
  • the chambers and passage of firs communicating chamber 431 and second ambient air communicatin and ambient air connection passage 433 are formed as film 160 is front side of Figure 16(a)
  • First ambient air communicating hole 434 which communicates air intake part 130 is formed on the side of second surface 437b tha surface 437a of first ambient air communicating chamber 431 (secon is the surface of plate part 438 described above)
  • second ambient air communicating h communicates with first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir chamber 111 the side of first surface 437a
  • third ambient air communicating h communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoir chamber 11 second surface 437b (plate part 438)
  • First ambient air communicati which communicate with first ambient air communicating chamber ambient air communicating chamber 432, respectively, are formed first surface 437a, and these communicating openings 433a and 433 areas that are substantially smaller than the side wall areas of fir communicating chamber 431 and second ambient air communicatin (side wall surfaces 431a and 432a on which communicating openings are formed) Because a part having a passage that introduces am extremely small cross sectional area (ambient air connection pa provided (so called labyrinth), the resistance of the flow path whe passes through
  • ambient air connection passa downward in the direction of second ambient air communicating cha first ambient air communicating chamber 431 Because ambient passage 433 slopes downward the device is in the position in which i is installed in refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1, ink that has p ambient air connection passage 433 can be naturally returned to chamber 111 due to gravity Moreover, because the cross sectional a air connection passage 433 is made small, the penetration of ink sto reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection passage 433 ca Here, when ink penetrates into ambient air connection passage 433, formed and it is sometimes impossible to introduce ambient air result As described above, because ambient air connection passa downward even if ink penetrates into the passage, the ink is re reservoir chamber 111, so the formation of meniscuses can be prevented Further ambient air connection passage 433 is formed as welding of film 160, so at least one of the surfaces is a side wal second ambient air communicating chamber 432 in the position cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) (stat Figure 16(a)) Therefore,
  • Figures 16(b) and 16(c) show the positions of ambient air c passage forming part 430 corresponding to each of the two loading po 16(b) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such tha connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side (the side of Ilia of frame part 110 is the lower side and first surface 437a is the lo Figure 16(c) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such air connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side (the chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side and second surfa lower side)
  • first ambient air communic 431, second ambient air communicating chamber 432, and ambient passage 433 as described above and establishing the opening p ambient air communicating hole 434 and the opening position of c opening 433b in positions that are symmetrical to ambient air conn 433 it is possible to prevent the leakage of ink from ambient air in Further, by making the cross sectional area of ambient air conne small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink and to prevent into first ambient air communicating chamber 431
  • Link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to F forming part 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake par
  • Link forming part 440 consists of ambient air side linking part provided on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left side in Figur side in Figure 14(b)) using inner circumference welded parts 415 boundaries, and dispensing side linking part 442, which is provided ink dispensing part 150 (right side in Figure 14(a) or left side in Fig ambient air side linking part 441 inner circumference welded par 414a, and 414b are respectively provided on the sides of first and se 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewed in the direction to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back side when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b)> here, perpendicular to the page is parallel to the Z direction) from this a linking part 441 Further, the upper end of the height direction ( ambient air side linking part 441 communicates with inner circumf part 412a of ambient air communicating passage forming part
  • First linking communicating hole 443 which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b, is formed on ambient air si 441, and second through fourth linking communicating holes 4 connect first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b are formed on d linking part 442
  • linking communicating holes 443 446 are linking forming part 440, first chamber Ilia and second chambe accurately
  • the part enclosed by ambient air side linking part 441, dispensi part 442, and ambient air communicating passage forming par reservoir chamber internal opening 113, which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b, and the part enclosed by a linking part 441, dispensing side linking part 442, and supply pat 420 is second reservoir internal opening 114, which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b
  • the part t ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111 and the part that supp inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside communicate in the forming part 440 and without the division of first chamber Ili chamber 111b
  • the introduction of ambient air and the su be performed in a stable space
  • Linking rib 418a which connects multiple inner circumference 412a 417a provided on the side of first opening 112a from link formin linking rib 418b, which connects inner circumference welded part provided on the side of second opening 112b from link forming part 4 on link forming part 440
  • These linking ribs 418a and 418b are not ill figure, but they are formed into thin walled shapes with vertical lower than inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and inner welded parts 412b to 417b Further, most of these linking ribs 418a formed on the edge of link forming part 440 As a result linking ribs connect inner circumference welded parts 412a to 417a and 412b to are formed on the edge of link forming part 440, so they can maintai of link forming part 440 Moreover linking ribs 418a and 418b ar thin walled shapes, and they are formed with vertical walls that a inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and 412b
  • dispensing passage forming part 45 equipped with dispensing cylinder part 451, which is formed i cylindrical shape into which ink dispensing plug 520 (see Figure 21), described below, is pressed first dispensing communicating hol communicates between this dispensing cylinder part 451 and the reservoir chamber 111, roughly U shaped dispensing partition wall provided from the outer surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, provided edge forms the forms the welded surface part on which film and partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect t chamber 111, and second dispensing communicating hole 454, wh opening part of dispensing partition wall 453
  • the opened part cylinder part 451 is opening 451a which is formed on the outside frame part 110, and the surface that opposes this opening 451a is bot of dispensing cylinder part 451
  • the region demarcated by dispensing 453 and film 160 is dispensing partition wall flow path 453a
  • Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference which film 160 is welded, and dispensing partition wall flow path 45 dispensing communicating hole 454 are formed in the state in whi welded As with the welded end part of the other inner circumferenc 411b to 417b the welded end part of dispensing partition wall 453 is the same virtual plane as the welded end part of outer circumferenc 400b
  • ink is disp reservoir chamber 111
  • ink is dispensed in a state in which seco communicating hole 454 is positioned on top and first dispensing c hole 452 is positioned on bottom (position in which the Y direction is becomes full the volume of ink expands and film 160 is damaged or d boundary where ink cartridge 14 is placed If film 160 is damaged, and if film 160 deforms, the volume inside ink reservoir chambe making it impossible to stably supply ink Therefore, in order to preve and deformation of film 160, ink is not dispensed to the degree that t reservoir chamber 111 becomes full
  • the air pressure inside ink reservoir chambe is dispensed is lower than the ambient pressure Therefore, decompression process in which the pressure is reduced by aspirati air mside ink reservoir chamber 111 from dispensing passage formi sometimes performed This is performed in order to reduce the amo air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to maintain the degree of deaer and to reduce the generation of air bubbles inside the ink
  • the deaer is for the purpose of maintaining the viscosity of the ink at a roughly and this is because regarding the generation of air bubbles inside th bubbles are supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) the pre to discharge the ink is not transmitted to the discharge opening (no the figure), so the ink cannot be correctly discharged
  • Detection part 140 projects outwa part 110 (right side in Figure 18(a))
  • Detection part 140 is equipped part 141, which encloses the end of sensor arm 470 (see Figure 19) part 473c) by sandwiching it with a pair of wall surfaces and for through which sensor arm 470 can be displaced
  • Enclosure part 141 i roughly box shaped passage by a bottom surface, which is formed b 141a inside enclosure part 141 (lower side in Figure 18(a)), a pair of which are formed by both side walls 141b that are provided on b bottom wall 141a, an inner side surface, which is formed by inner that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side wal ceiling surface, which is formed ceiling wall 14 Id that connects to t both side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c an opposite bottom wall 141a
  • Detection part 140 is also equipped with a part 142 which is provided such that it projects upward from the formed by bottom wall 141a
  • the ink stored inside detection part and when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step with this reduct liquid surface I of the ink falls below detection part 140 the ink m part 140 is depleted but because first gap t3 between sensor arm 470 141 is minute ink remains inside detection part 140 due to the sur the ink and sensor arm 470 sometimes does not rotate normally due tension of the ink
  • the reason that first gap t3 is provide spacing is that, when this spacing is made wide, the spacing between part 57a and light receiving part 57b also widens, and the detectio remaining ink detection sensor 57 thus deteriorates Therefore, by supporting part 142 s,uch that first
  • vertical wall 143 that connects to a part 141 is formed on sloping surface 143a, which slopes downward i of supply path forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Slopin constitutes a portion of the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer welded part 400b)
  • vertical wall 143 slopes downward in the direction o forming part 420, and the junction part with the inside wall of fra formed into a roughly right angle, so ink can be efficiently guided in t supply path forming part 420 by this slope and the capillary force I the junction part of vertical wall 143 and the inside wall of frame pa fluid guiding path (guide) for guiding the ink Because the thick supporting part 142 and vertical wall 143 are formed such that the accurately detect the amount of remaining
  • sensor arm 470 will be described with reference to Figure 1 a diagram that shows sensor arm 470
  • Figure 19(a) is a diagram t front side of sensor arm 470
  • Figure 19(b) is a diagram that sho 470 from the perspective of arrow XiXb in Figure 19(a)
  • Sensor arm 4 for detecting the amount of remaining ink inside ink reservoir cham arm 470 is manufactured by injection molding using a resin material for example), and it has light blocking properties because it is formed
  • Sensor arm 470 is a rotating member that rotates according to remaining ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and a portion i remaining ink detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5), which detects remaining ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111
  • Sensor arm 4 equipped with balance part 471, which is formed from a material specific gravity than that of the ink attachment part 472, which frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 473 which ext attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to ba (upward in Figure 19(a)) further extends sloping upward, and block possible detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57
  • Attachmen linking part that connects balance part 471 and arm part 473
  • Roughly cylindrical attachment shaft 472a which is atta sandwiching part 425 (see Figure 14) of frame part 110, is formed part 472
  • This attachment shaft 472a is formed with a diameter that i the inside diameter of arm sandwiching part 425 and is larger than th opening of arm sandwiching part 425 As a result, when sensor arm it can be operated with little resistance and the deviation of sensor arm sandwiching part 425 can be prevented
  • Arm part 473 consists of vertical arm part 473a which extends resistance when sensor arm 470 rotates increases, which someti impossible to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Furthe above, when the thickness of detection part 140 increases, the range remaining ink detection sensor 57 widens accordingly and the detect deteriorates, so an expensive, high performance remaining ink de with favorable detection properties becomes necessary Therefore, a formed with a thin profile in order to prevent increases in the scale o 14 and to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Ribs 473d vertical arm part 473a and sloping arm part 473b, and the strength by these ribs
  • Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with a specific gravit than that of the ink, so when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step in the amount of remaining ink balance part 471 moves in the di bottom part of frame part 110 (direction of the bottom part of ink rese 111, downward in Figures 14(a) and 14(b)) in step with this drop surface I of the ink
  • balance part 471 moves in the direction part, and arm part 473 moves in the direction of the top part using at less than that of the ink, so a working process is not required, and it is manufacture complex dies, so the manufacturing cost of sensor arm 470 can be
  • Figure 20 is a diagram that shows a portion of ink reservoir eleme 20(a) is a diagram that shows the side surface of ink reservoir eleme 20(b) is a diagram that shows a partial front view of ink reservoir ele Figure 20(c) is a cross sectional view through line XXc XXc in Figure
  • ink supply part 12 intake part 130, and detection part 140 are provided on one of the s frame part 110 (one end surface, the side surface in the fron installation when ink cartridge 14 is installed)
  • s frame part 110 one end surface, the side surface in the fron installation when ink cartridge 14 is installed
  • ink installed inside accommodating chamber 50 of refill unit 13 s Therefore, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed inside ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, and ink supply sequentially aligned from top (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom o
  • the elements are aligned in the height direction (Y d cartridge 14
  • width t5 of detection part 140 is for it is shorter than diameter t ⁇ of the opening of ink supply part 120 (o supply cap 600 described below (see Figure 34)) Further, as illustr 20(b) detection part 140 is formed such that it is concave in the dire part 110 (in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir cha respect to ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
  • arm part 473 of sensor arm 470 is positioned o detection part 140
  • ink adhere surfaces of these detection surfaces 140a and 140b it is sometimes detect the accurate amount of remaining ink
  • detection part 1 in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with supply part 120, so it is possible to make it difficult for ink to adhe part 140, even if ink drips from ink supply part 120
  • detection surfaces 140a and 140b are vertical when in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in re ⁇ ll unit 13, the ink is most sus effects of gravity when ink cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13 adhered to detection surfaces 140a and 140b, so it drops quickly possible to substantially avoid the transfer of ink to light receiving light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 Furthe that drops does not adhere to the end surface of ink supply part 120
  • edge part 140c where the side surface of frame part 110 surfaces 140a and 140b intersect is formed at a roughly perpendicula ink adheres to the vicinity of edge 140c the capillary force of edge the ink because edge 140c is formed at a roughly perpendicular angle, likely to flow to the side of ink supply part 120 through edge 140c possible to reduce the adherence of ink to detection surfaces 140a and
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primaril into four elements
  • the four parts are frame part 110 ink supply m which constitutes ink supply part 120, ambient air intake mechani constitutes ambient air intake part 130, and ink dispensing plug pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing part 150
  • Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of an elastic member such as Pul once it is pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451 it cannot be easily even if the needle is removed or inserted, it is configured such that t needle is blocked ink supply element 115 (arranged on the front and back sides perpendicular to the page in Figure 21)
  • protruding parts protruding part 117b is not illustrated in the figure
  • protruding parts which pr direction of the outer circumference of ambient air intake element fasten ambient intake mechanism 510, are symmetrically arranged intake element 117 centered on the axial center of ambient air intak (arranged on the front and back sides in directions perpendicular Figure 21)
  • ink supply mechanism 500 is supply cap 600, which is installed on ink supply element 116, sup which is made of an elastic resin material such as rubber into which Figure 2) of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) is inserted, sup which blocks the flow path of ink when this supply joint 610 and th formed with the same material and into the same shape as those spring 630, valve seat 660, which makes contact with this second su and receives check valve 670, and cover 680 which covers check valv the valve and this valve seat 660
  • Supply valve 620, first supply spri slider 640 and second supply spring 650 constitute supply valve that actually operates
  • ambient air intake mechanism 5 with ambient air cap 700 which is installed on ambient air intak ambient air joint 710, which is made of an elastic resin material s ambient air valve 720, which blocks the flow path of ink when this a 710 and the bottom wall make contact and makes contact with b multifunction device 1 (see Figure 5) and opens the flow path (passa air when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (refi Figure l), first ambient air spring 730, which is housed inside this am 720 and is made of a resinous elastic material, ambient air slider 740 the open surface of ambient air valve 720 and can be operated direction, which is the movement direction of ambient air valve 720 (direction of arrow 02 in Figure 22(b), hereafter called the "axial d ambient air supply mechanism 510", as is clear from Figure 14, ambi 510 becomes parallel to the X direction when ink cartridge 14 is loade ambient air spring 750, which is housed inside this ambient air sli formed with the same material and into the same shape as those
  • supply cap 600 supply joint 610, supply valve 620, fir supply springs 630 and 650, supply slider 640 valve seat 660, ch cross sectional view of supply cap 600 through line XXIIIe XXIIIe in
  • supply cap 600 is formed with a t from a side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicu in Figure 23(a)), and the upper side part in Figure 23(a) is supply sec which is fastened to the outer circumferential surface of ink supply el is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape, while the lower side part i is ink storage part 602, which has an ink storage space for preve dripping to the outside of ink cartridge 14
  • Engagement holes 603a and 603b (see Figure 23(b) for engagem which are formed from the linking part of ink storage part 602 to t vicinity of the top (vicinity of the upper side end in Figure 23(a)) an protruding parts 116a and 116b (see Figure 21) of ink supply elem supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21) supply securing part 601 ,
  • a pair of supply cap cutout parts (see Figure 23(c) for supply cap cutout part 604b), which are forme line that is roughly orthogonal to the straight line that connects eng 603a and 603b (positions moved approximately 90° with respect to a of ink supply mechanism 500) and are cut out facing the direction part 602 from the top surface of supply securing part 601 (upper Figure 23(b)) are formed on supply securing part 601
  • insertion hole 605 into which needle 49 (see Figure 2) is inser below, is formed in roughly the center position of ink storage part 60
  • the region from the circle that f hole 605 to the circle one step outward is first upper wall 606a, w upper end surface of ink storage part 602, and the region from the circ lower wall 606c and second upper wall 606d is outer circumferen which forms the outer circumferential surface of ink storage part 60 606b forms the cylindrical part inside ink storage part 60 circumferential wall 606e, which is connected to this sloping wall 606 606c, forms the cylindrical part of the outside that encloses slop (cylindrical part of the inside)
  • sloping wall 606b slopes downward so the insert needle 49 is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross se Figure 23(e) such that it decreases in diameter towards insertion h maximum diameter of that of opening 600a, which forms the final exi a result, the inner circumferential surface on the side of axial center wall 606b becomes the insertion path into which needle 49 (see Figure The space of range t7 illustrated in Figures 23(c) and 23(c) (in ot space formed by sloping wall 606b, lower wall 606c and outer circu 606e) forms ink storing part 607, in which ink can be stored (accumul
  • supply cap 600 When supply cap 600 is attached to ink supply element 116 (s protruding parts 116a and 116b of ink supply element 116 protrud circumferential direction, so supply cap 600 is attached as it increas in the outer circumferential direction Because supply cap cutout p 604b are formed, the diameter of supply cap 600 increases in the dire engagement parts 603a and 603b move away from one another Th supply cap 600 is to be attached, it can be attached without ap pressure, so it is possible to improve the installation efficiency damage to supply cap 600
  • Figure 24 is a diagram that shows supply joint 610
  • Figure 24(a) that shows a side view of supply joint 610
  • Figure 24(b) is a diagra plan view of supply joint 610
  • Figure 24(c) is a diagram that shows a outer circumference part of supply joint 610
  • This joint outer circumfe is the part that is sandwiched between second upper wall 606d of s and the outside end surface of ink supply element 116 when in the supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116
  • the part illustr step of joint outer circumference part 611 is joint inner circumfer which is pressed into and arranged inside ink supply element 116 ( and forms the inner circumference part of supply joint 610
  • the u joint inner circumference part 612 is illustrated in Figure 24(a) Fu illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 612 is joints 613, which makes contact with supply valve 620 (see Figure 25) Sup made of an elastic material such as a resin rubber
  • joint contact part 613 projects fro 612a of joint inner circumference part 612 (surface on the side that with supply valve 620) Joint contact part 613 is formed such that it n tip 613a (upper end part in Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes co bottom surface of supply valve 620 and blocks the flow path of the ink protruding part 614, which protrudes from the inner circumferential axial center Ol opening 612c, which forms the insertion opening of Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 612b of joint inner circumfer (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped insertion passage 612d, w between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614 are formed circumference part 612
  • the portio passage 612d that is formed in a stepped shape is formed with roug bottom surface 612b, step part flow path 615a, which is demarcat insertion passage 612d connected to opening 612c, protruding part fl which
  • the lower half of step part flow path 615a is formed in a steppe direction of axial center 01, and the upper half of step part flow path in a tapered shape towards protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, path 615a is formed in a stepped shape such that the diameter grad from opening 612c towards the contact surface with inner circumfe 614a of joint protruding part 614
  • the lower part of step part flo formed in a stepped shape so even if needle 49 (see Figure 2) is r minute quantity of ink flows through ink flow path 615, the ink capillary force due to the angular part of this step part so it is poss ink from dripping to the outside of supply joint 610
  • supply cap 600 is equ storage part 602 so the portion of the lower half of step part flow pat formed in a stepped shape may alternatively be formed in a tapered s
  • Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smalle ink flow path 615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindric inside diameter of this protruding part flow path 615b is formed s slightly smaller than the diameter of needle 49 (see Figure 2)
  • Con path 615c is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape hav diameter that is larger than that of protruding part flow path 615b
  • Needle 49 which is inserted from opening 612c, is guided to the u step part flow path 615a that is formed in a tapered shape and i protruding part flow path 615b
  • the insid protruding part flow path 615b is slightly smaller than the diamete needle 49 elastically adheres to inner circumferential surface protruding part 614 that forms protruding part flow path 615b and is such that it spreads protruding part flow path 615b
  • the protruding part 614 acts to seal the periphery of needle 49 that i protru
  • Figure 25 is a diagram that shows supply valve 620
  • Figure 25(a) that shows a side view of supply valve 620
  • Figure 25(b) is a diagra side view of supply valve 620 from the perspective of arrow XXVb
  • Figure 25(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply valve 620, a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply valve 620, and Fig cross sectional view of supply valve 620 through line XXVe XXVe in F
  • supply valve 620 is equipped wit mechanism 500 Moreover, as illustrated in Figure 25(c), valve proje which projects in the opposite direction as valve bottom wall 621 f valve outer circumferential wall 622 in the direction of axial center 0 valve outer circumferential wall 622, and valve guide grooves 623 are the vicinity of the bottom of valve outer circumferential wall 622 fro valve projecting wall 624 As a result, because the distance of valve 623 is secured as a long distance the deviation of slider loose inse from valve guide grooves 623 can be prevented
  • valve constraining parts 625 which project direction as valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of suppl connected to valve outer circumferential wall 622
  • Each of the valv parts 625 is equipped with valve hook part 626, which projects towar Ol from its tip (tip of the upper side portion in Figure 25(a)) and supply slider 640
  • valve protruding parts 622a which protrude i shapes in the outer circumferential direction and are formed from bottom of valve outer circumferential wall 622, are formed o circumferential wall 622 with equal spacing along valve outer circu 622
  • These valve protruding parts 622a are provided in order to sm the operations of supply valve 620 when supply valve 620 is inserted i element 116 (see Figure 21)
  • valve protruding parts 62 semicircular shapes are provided, only valve protruding parts 622a with the inner circumferential surface of ink supply element 116, and bottom wall 621 (direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 25(c)), valve bottom wall 621 in positions corresponding to valve guides constraining part 625 in the direction of axial center Ol of in
  • Valve inner circumferential wall 629 which is formed in a rough that covers the outer circumferential surface of spring top part 632 spring 630, is provided on the outside of valve bearing part 628 and o ink flow path 627
  • This valve inner circumferential wall 629 is provi restrict the movement of first supply spring 630 in a direction that is axial center 01, and first supply spring 630 is accurately bent in t axial center Ol by restricting the movement of first supply spring 630 that is orthogonal to axial center 01 larger diameter)
  • ring shaped spring top part 632 which is formed w that is smaller than the diameter of this spring bottom part 631 and part of the upper surface of first supply spring 630 (end of the side wi diameter)
  • spring plastic part 633 which is connected between part 632 and spring bottom part 631 and bends and deforms when a in the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 ( direction of supply valve 620 that is pressed into needle 49 (see Fig biased direction of first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 6 part 6
  • ink flow path 634 which communi tip of spring top part 632 (right end surface in Figure 26(d)) to the bot spring bottom part 631 (left end surface in Figure 26(d)), is formed spring 630
  • This ink flow path 634 consists of top part flow path demarcated by the inner circumferential surface of spring top part 63 flow path 634b, which is demarcated by the inner circumferential su plastic part 633, and bottom part flow path 634c, which is demarcate circumferential surface of spring bottom part 631
  • top part flow path 634a is formed into a quadr the four corners are not blocked even if air bubbles that grow la opening surface of top part flow path 634a accumulate, so it is pos decreases in printing quality by preventing the ink flow path from Further, the opening surface of top part flow path 634a is not quadrilateral, and it may alternatively be formed into a polyg hexahedron or a star shape As in this embodiment, even if it is circ formed with a diameter with which the effects of air bubbles would b
  • spring top part 632 is formed in thick cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial center formed such that the cross sectional shape perpendicular to the dir center Ol (biased direction of first supply spring 630) is uniform
  • Si bottom part 631 is also formed into a relatively thick cylindrical shap in the direction of axial center 01, and it is formed such that the shape perpendicular to the direction of axial center Ol is uniform
  • spring plastic part 633 is formed reversed bowl shape (or roughly conical shape) that curves (or prescribed angle in the direction of axial center Ol As a result, the respect to loading in the direction of axial center Ol become weak in spring bottom part 631 and spring top part 632 Furthermore, spri 633 is formed such that it has a thinner profile than spring bottom spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength Accordingly, wh spring 630 elastically deforms, spring plastic 633 plastically deforms
  • Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that spring 630, and the composition of second supply spring 650 cons Figure 27 is a diagram that shows supply slider 640 Figure 27(a that shows a side view of supply slider 640, Figure 27(b) is a diagra side view ,of supply slider 640 from the perspective of arrow XXVIIb i
  • Figure 27(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply slider 64 is a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply slider 640, and Fi cross sectional view of supply slider 640 through line XXVIIe XX 27(c)
  • Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a hig hardness than first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) and second sup and it is primarily equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 64 the outer periphery of supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting 642b, which project from this slider outer circumferential wall 641 i of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, a pair of slider loose i 643 which extend from slider outer circumferential wall 641 to th slider projecting wall 642a (upper side end in Figure 27(a)) and are lo into valve guide grooves 623 of supply valve 620 (see Figure 25), slider 644, either side on which first and second supply springs 630 and 650 which is formed on the inside of slider outer circumferential wall 6 contact with spring bottom parts 631 and 651 of first and second sp 650 and slider through hole 645, which is formed in the center pos platform part 644 and connects the top and bottom of slider platform clear from Figure 27(c), slider projecting walls 642a and
  • slider outer circumferential wall 641 is for it is roughly equivalent to the outside diameter spring lower parts 6 circumferential wall 641 and slider protruding part 642), so when t inserted into valve guide grooves 623 (see Figure 25), they are mov the direction of axial center Ol of supply slider 640, and misali direction orthogonal to the direction of axial center Ol can be preven
  • Figure 28 is a diagram that shows valve seat 660
  • Figure 28(a) is shows a side view of valve seat 660
  • Figure 28(b) is a diagram that view of valve seat 660
  • Figure 28(c) is a diagram that shows a botto seat 660
  • Figure 28(d) is a cross sectional view of valve seat 66 XXVIIId XXVIIId in Figure 28(b)
  • valve seat 660 is equipped with val part 661, which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and with spring top part 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat 662 which are placed on the top surface of this valve seat bottom p side in Figure 28(a))
  • Each valve seat bearing part 662 is equipped sloping surface 662a, which slopes downward as it approaches the c seat 660, and check valve 670 which will be described below, is re valve seat sloping surface 662a
  • valve seat bearing parts 662 ar prescribed spacing in the circumferential direction of valve seat 66 seat through holes 662b, which pass through the front and back of v are formed on three of the six valve seat bearing parts These fi through holes 662b are formed on a portion other than valve seat s 662a of valve seat bearing part 662 (horizontal portion of valve sea 662) Therefore, because first valve seat through holes 662b are forme that differs from the portion that receives check valve 670, the block flow path can be prevented
  • valve seat through holes 663 which pass thro bottom surface of valve seat bottom part 661
  • valve seat c grooves 664 connect second valve seat through holes 663 to one anoth linear manner on the bottom surface of valve seat bottom part 661
  • valve seat communicating grooves 664 which intersect at axial c formed
  • a pair of valve projecting parts 665 which pro bottom surface, is formed on the bottom surface of valve seat bot Spring top part 652 of second supply spring is housed in each of th projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumfe of spring top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of secon 650 in the direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
  • valve seat bearing parts 662 As illustrated in Figure 28(d), a gap is formed between valv surface 662a of valve seat bearing parts 662 and second valve seat 663 in the direction of axial center Ol As a result, even if chec supported on valve seat sloping surface 662a, the flow path of the i Moreover, even if the end surface of spring top part 632 of second sup makes contact with the bottom surfaces of second valve seat thro second valve seat through holes 663 are positioned to the outside circumference of valve seat projecting part 664 (virtual line R in Fi the flow path of the ink is secured by valve seat communicating groo seat communicating grooves 664 connect all of the second valve seat 663, so even if there are second valve seat through holes 663 that a valve seat projecting part 665, the ink flow path can be reliably secur
  • Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670
  • Figure 29(a) is shows a side view of check valve 670
  • Figure 29(b) is a diagram that view of check valve 670
  • Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a botto valve 670
  • Figure 29(c) is a cross sectional view of check valve 67 XXIXd XXIXd in Figure 29(a) which is formed with a thin profile adheres to cover 680 as it is elasti so it is possible to reliably block the ink flow path communication bet and check valve 670
  • Shaft part 672 is a part that is inserted into second cover throug Figure 30) of cover 680, which will be described below
  • This sha positioned in the vicinity of cover 680 in the state in which it is att 680, and it has ball part 672a, which is formed into a roughly spheric ball part 672a is formed with a diameter that is greater than that o through hole 684 of cover 680, and it prevents check valve 670 from it is attached to cover 680
  • cover 680 As a result it is possible to reduce the loss 670 when manufacturing ink cartridge 14, and operationally is impr
  • Figure 30 is a diagram that shows cover 680
  • Figure 30(a) is a shows a side view of cover 680
  • Figure 30(b) is a diagram that shows cover 680
  • Figure 30(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of c
  • Figure 30(d) is a cross sectional view of cover 680 through line Figure 30(b)
  • Cover 680 is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape in which the side (side of valve seat 660 (see Figure 28)) is opened Cover 680 is cover outer circumferential wall 681 which forms the outer periphery, part 682, which forms the top surface of cover 680 (upper side in Fig it is formed such that the bottom surface side is opened Valve seat 66 are blocked, and the ink flow path is thus also blocked
  • second cover through hole 684 into which shaft par valve 670 is inserted, is formed in the center of cover top part 682 (p through axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500) Shaft par valve 670 is inserted into this second cover through hole 684, and che thereby attached Even m the state in which check valve 670 is insert cover through hole 684, the flow path of the ink is formed on a portio circumferential surface
  • umbrella part 671 of check va contact with cover top part 682 the entire first cover through hole is ink flow path of second cover through hole 684 formed in simultaneously blocked
  • Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 3l(b that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700 from the perspective o in Figure 3l(a), Figure 3l(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of a 700, Figure 3l(d) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient ai Figure 3l(e) is a cross sectional view of ambient air cap 700 XXXIe XXXIe in Figure 3l(c)
  • ambient air cap 700 is equipped cylindrical ambient air securing part 701 which forms the side wall o air cap 700 and is fastened to ambient air intake element 117 (see F ambient air cap bottom wall 702, which forms the bottom wall of a 700 Engagement holes 703a and 703b (see Figure 3l(b) for engagem which are formed from the bottom part of ambient air securing part 7 in Figure 3l(a)) to the vicinity of the top part (vicinity of the end of th Figure 3l(a)) and are engaged with protruding parts 117a and 117b intake element 117 described above when ambient air cap 700 i 1 in Figure 3l(d), ambient air cap insertion hole 705, into which joint (see Figure 32) of ambient air joint 710, which will be described be open part 721a (see Figure 33) of ambient air valve 720 are inserted, roughly central position on ambient air cap bottom wall 702 Ambie (see Figure 32) is housed such that it makes contact with the in ambient air cap bottom wall 702 and the inner
  • ambient air cap 700 When ambient air cap 700 is attached to ambient air intake protruding parts 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 p outer circumferential direction, as with supply cap 600, so ambient attached as it increases in diameter in the outer circumferen Therefore when ambient air cap 700 is to be attached, it can be att applying strong pressure, so it is possible to improve the installa while reducing damage to ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(b that shows a plan view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(c) is a shows a bottom view of ambient air joint 710, and Figure 32(d) is a view of ambient air joint 710 through line XXXIId XXXIId in Figure
  • ambient air joint 710 is formed in f a side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular Figure 32(a))
  • the part illustrated in the second step from the bottom Figure 32(a)) is joint outer circumference part 711, which is the pa contact with the inner circumferential surface of ambient air securin Figure 31) of ambient air cap 700 and ambient air cap bottom wall the outer circumference part of ambient air joint 710
  • the part illustr step of this joint outer circumference part 711 is joint inner circumfer
  • the axial center of joint outer circ 711, joint inner circumference part 712, joint contact part 713, and j 714 is positioned on the same axial center as in the direction of axi ambient air intake mechanism 510
  • ambient air joint 710 elastic material such as a resm rubber, so when ink cartridge 14 multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), joint skirt part 714, which is thin profile makes contact with the end surface of multifunction d elastically deformed
  • joint contact part 713 projects fr 712a of joint inner circumference part 712 (surface on the side that with ambient air valve 720)
  • Joint contact part 713 is formed such t toward tip 713a (upper end part in Figure 32(d)), and this tip 713a with the bottom surface of ambient air valve 720 and blocks the amb path
  • joint passage 715 whi the bottom surface of joint inner circumference part 712 to tip 713a part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32(d)), is formed on am 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720 is inserted passage 715
  • FIG 33 is a diagram that shows ambient air valve 720 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air valve 720, and Fig diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient air valve 720
  • Ambien has a configuration in which valve open part 721a, which projects fr surface of valve bottom wall 721 and opens the ambient air intake p contact with the side of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), is a valve 620 Therefore, detailed descriptions of valve bottom wall 72 circumferential wall 722, valve protruding part 722a, valve guide gro projecting wall 724, valve constraining part 725, valve hook part 72 part (lower end surface in Figure 22) to valve bottom wall 721 circumferential direction, is formed on the outer circumferential s open part 721a This valve open part 721a passes into joint passage 32) of ambient air joint 710 described above, and a portion of it is outside of ambient air cap 700 (see Figure 31) When ink cartridge 1 multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), valve open part 721a makes co end surface of multifunction device 1 and
  • joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 also mak the end surface of multifunction device 1 and elastically deforms, a communication between the ambient air intake path and the outsid part 714 As a result, ambient air that is introduced from the side o device 1 can be introduced smoothly Moreover, even if joint s elastically deforms toward axial center 02 and makes contact with v 721a, the ambient air intake path can be secured by convex part 721 part 721a It is therefore possible to prevent the ambient air intake p blocked and ensure that ambient air is introduced into ink reservoi (see Figure 14)
  • ink supply mechanism 500 is ins stepped shape that can house cover 680 Cover 680 is inserted such contact with stepped surface 801a of this projecting wall 801, which i stepped shape, and the position on the side of first supply communic of ink supply mechanism 500 is thus determined
  • Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is inserted into second cover th of cover 680, and valve seat 660 is arranged such that it houses this c inside cover 680
  • Second supply spring 650 is arranged on the bottom this valve seat 660 (left side in Figure 34)
  • supply slider 640 is that it houses this second supply spring 650
  • a spring 630 is arranged between supply slider 640 and supply valve supply joint 610 is arranged such that it makes contact with the bot supply valve 620
  • supply cap 600 is fastened to the outside element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of th 610
  • Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts of ink supply element 116 so the position on the outside of ink supp 500 is determined Therefore, the position of the direction of axial ce supply mechanism 500 is determined by supply cap 600 and stepped s inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116
  • the inside diameter of inner circumferential surface 800 of ink s 116 is formed such that it is slightly larger than the outside diam valve 620, and it is configured such that the operation of supply va direction of axial center Ol can be performed smoothly inside ink s 116
  • four valve protruding parts 622a are forme circumferential surface of supply valve 620, and it is configured contact surface with inner circumferential surface 800 is small
  • the supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal direction with respect to a sandwiched by spring bottom part 631 of first supply spring 630 and part 631 of the second spring member 650 On the contact side of s part 644 with spring bottom part 631 of second supply spring 650, it two valve hook parts 626 of supply valve 620, and movement in the di center Ol is thus restricted
  • the space formed between supply valve slider 640 is shorter than the length of first supply spring 630 in t axial center 01, so first supply spring 630 is already plastically de position in which it is attached to ink supply element 116
  • ambient air intake mechanism 510 which is attached t intake element 117, will be described On inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117 protruding part 811, which pro direction of ambient air intake mechanism 510 (left direction in formed on the end surface of ambient air intake passage forming p side of first ambient air communicating chamber
  • This protrudin configured as a pair of plate shaped member, and it makes contact surface of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750
  • a ambient air intake path is formed between protruding part 811 and s 752 of second ambient air spring 750 Moreover the position of ambi mechanism 510 on the side of first ambient air communicatin determined as a result of second ambient air spring 750 making protruding part 811
  • ambient air slider 7 on ambient air intake mechanism 510 such that it houses second amb 750
  • first ambient air spring 730 is housed by ambient air slid opposite side of second ambient air spring 750 while first ambient ai arranged between ambient air slider 740 and ambient air valve 7 ambient air joint 710 is arranged such that it makes contact wit intake element 117
  • the space formed between ambient air valve 720 an slider 740 is shorter than the length of first ambient air spring 730 i of axial center 02, so, as with ink supply mechanism 500 first amb 730 is already plastically deformed in the position in which it is attac air intake element 117
  • Figure 35 is a diagram tha manufacturing process before film 160 is welded
  • Figure 36 is a explains the welding process of film 160
  • Figure 36(a) is a diagram th welding surface of frame part 110 onto which film 160 is welded
  • Figure 37 is a diagram that explains the manufacturing proc after film 160 is welded
  • Figure 37(a) is a diagram that explains t process in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake are attached to frame part 110
  • Figure 37(b) is a diagram that decompression process
  • Figure 37(c) is a diagram that exp dispensing process
  • Figure 38 is a diagram that explains the installa case 200
  • Figure 38(a) is a diagram that explains the process in w sandwiches frame part 110
  • Figure 38(b) is a diagram that explai process in which case 200 is welded
  • Figure 39 is a diagram tha manufacturing process performed before ink cartridge 14 is shipped a
  • a supporting part that forms the axis operation of sensor arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (att 472a) of sensor arm 470 is supported on arm sandwiching part 425 110, but a configuration in which an attachment shaft is provided frame part 110 and a sandwiching part is provided on the side of s may also be used and a configuration in which sensor arm 470 and f are attached using a hinge junction would also be acceptable In o long as sensor arm 4 ⁇ 0 is attached such that it can rotate with respec 110 its attachment structure may take any form
  • film 160 sec Film 160 is welded to frame part 110 such that it covers both the op opening 112a and second opening 112b
  • film 160 is sides of frame part 110 in two securing processes — a first securing pr film 160 is welded to first opening 112a (preparatory process), and a s process in which film 160 is welded to second opening 112b
  • film 160 is cut such that it is l external outline of frame part 110, and it covers frame part 110 At 160 is arranged on first opening 112a and second opening 112b witho aspirating film 160 with an aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) fr frame part 110 Ultrasound welded surface 900 of an ultrasonic weld illustrated in the figure) is then placed on film 160 such that it co circumference parts of first and second openings 112a and circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of film 160, welded to frame part 110
  • FIG 37(a) outer circumference welded parts 400a inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b
  • ultrasound welded surface 900 of the ultrasonic wel configured such that it covers all of the welded parts (outer circumf described below
  • film 160 may b type of substance
  • a film in which a nylon film and a film are formed into two layers or a film formed by mixing nylon an or nylon and polypropylene could be used
  • Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is ma type of substance as the film of film 160 on the side of frame part 110 160 and frame part 110 are formed from the same material, both fil welded parts can be fused and welded reliably at the time of ultraso this embodiment, film 160 has a double layer structure Nylon films polyethylene films from the perspective of strength but their meltin so they are deficient from the perspective of welding operationahty T film 160 is formed with a double layer structure made of nylon and the strength is secured, and by using the polyethylene layer as th welded to frame part 110 welding can be performed at a low heatin so welding operationahty is secured Furthermore, the nylon layer d the welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of vicinity of the welded parts and the strength of the film in the vicinit parts can also be maintained
  • the attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 to ambient air i 117 is performed in a process in which a compo ambient air joint 710, ambient air valve 720, first ambient air sprin air slider 740, and second ambient air spring 750 are formed as a u air cap 700 is inserted inside inner circumferential surface 810 o intake element 117 and ambient air cap 700 is fixed to the outer c surface of ambient air intake element 117 At this time, ambient pushed to the side of ambient air intake element 117 and engagem and 703b of ambient air cap 700 are engaged with protruding parts of ambient air intake element 117 In ambient air joint 710 circumference part 712 is pressed inside inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117, and joint outer circumference sandwiched between ambient air intake element 117 and ambien When the attachment of ambient air cap 700 to ambient air intake frame part 110, suction tube 911 of pressure reducing device 910 i into supply joint 610 of ink supply mechanism
  • ink dispensing needle 920 i ink dispensing plug 520, and ink is dispensed into frame part 110 chamber 111) (ink dispensing process)
  • the air press reservoir chamber 111 after ink is dispensed is air pressure pi (f Moreover, "a prescribed amount of ink” refers to the quantity for surface I of the ink drops below second ambient air communicating third ambient an* communicating hole 436 of ambient air communic forming part 430, as illustrated in Figure 37(c) Therefore, when in the penetration of mk into ambient air connection passage 433 can b purpose for not dispensing ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 u space is left inside mk reservoir chamber 111 is to, as described abo
  • the subsequent process that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be subsequent decompression process is performed using ink dispensi which was inserted into ink dispensing plug 520
  • a that supplies ink (not illustrated in the figure) and a pressure reduc reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambient air inside frame illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing needle 920 ink is completely dispensed, the flow path is switched and decomp pressure reducing device is begun
  • the air pressure p3 third press reservoir chamber 111 after subsequent decompression is performe the air pressure pi inside ink reservoir chamber 111 after the in Therefore the quantity of gas inside ink reservoir chamber 111 furth a result of the subsequent decompression process, so the generation mside the ink can be prevented, and the deterioration of printing qu bubbles can be avoided
  • the ink that flows in at the ti dispensing process collides with the inside surface inside ink reservoi so air bubbles are more likely to generate
  • rod members 215a to 2 member 210 are inserted into three through-holes 460a to 460c (see Figure 14 f 460b and 460c), which are formed on the outer circumference part of frame p reservoir element 110 is thus installed in first case member 210
  • 120 supply cap 600
  • ambient air intake part 130 ambient air cap 700
  • Second case member 220 is then attached such that case fitting ho 225c (not illustrated m the figure) of second case member 220 engage with ro and second case members 210 and 220, first case welded part 21 member 210 and first case welded part 226 of second case member 2 together, and second case welded part 217 of first case member 210 a welded part 227 of second case member 220
  • first and second case members 210 and 220 after the ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first a members 210 and 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultras absorbed by the ink Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations welded parts of frame part 110 or film 160 are damaged or film 160 p of vibration accompanying the welding of case 200 Moreover wh parts of first and second case members 210 and 220 are partiall generation of vibration due to ultrasonic welding is reduced, so the d part or the peeling of film 160 can be further reduced
  • case projecting parts 214a a projecting part 214a is not illustrated in the figure) and case projecti and 224b (case projecting part 214b is not illustrated in the figure) p from ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
  • cartridge 14 is to be installed in inkjet recording device 1, even if ink dropped, case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 224a, and 224b make im ground, so the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intak be prevented Further, the opening of the ambient air intake path or projecting cutout parts 214b and 224b of first and second case membe and protector 300 is thus attached to case 200 Because second p parts 330a and 330b of protector 300 elastically deform in directio from one another, protector 300 can be easily attached and detached
  • ink cartridge 14 is housed inside 930 in order to ship ink cartridge 14 (housing process)
  • the inside of 930 is then decompressed by pressure reducing device 940 (pack packaging space decompression process)
  • Packaging bag 930 is a ba one open end (end of the right front side of Figure 39(b)), and in process, all of the other opened portions excluding opening 931 are welded in a state m which ink cartridge 14 is enclosed
  • Suction tube 9 reducing device 940 is inserted through this opening 931, and the am of packaging bag 930 is aspirated and reduced by activating suction p
  • the air pressure of packaging bag 930 due to this decompression is a than the ambient pressure, but it is reduced such that it becomes a (second pressure), which is lower than air pressure p3 that is redu reservoir chamber 111 (or air pressure pi when a subsequent decompr is not performed)
  • second pressure which is lower than air pressure p3 that is redu reservoir chamber 111 (or air pressure pi when a subsequent decomp
  • film 160 of ink cartridge 14 can be plasticall the side of packaging bag 930 (side of case 200) If the air pressure ms bag 930 is higher than the air pressure inside ink reservoir chambe reservoir chamber 111 so film 160 is can be deformed on the side of 930 (revertible) Therefore, even in cases in which it is not used for time, it is possible to reduce situations in which it becomes impossibl supply ink due to the solidification of film 160, and it is possible damage of film 160
  • ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging decompressed in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 2 makes direct contact with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink suppl packaging bag 930 deforms due to decompression Valve open part 7 the outside of ambient air intake part 130, so if packaging bag 930 contact with valve open part 721a, valve open part 721a operates an air intake path is sometimes opened If the ambient air intake path ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 leaks out Moreover, ambient a 130 and ink supply part 120 are sometimes damaged in step with the packaging bag 930
  • this embodiment protector 300 is at according to the amount of ink stored and the color of the ink Ho embodiment, case 200 is covered after ink is dispensed into ink rese 111 of ink reservoir element 100, so common parts can be used for element 100 In other words even if the shape of the case differs, element 100 can be commonly used As a result, the manufacturi cartridge 14 can be reduced
  • ink dispensing part 150 (ink dispen is completely concealed by case 200 such that it cannot be seen from problems m which ink spills outside as a result of the user acciden ink dispensing plug 520 can be prevented
  • Figure 40 is a diagram t method in which ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction devic
  • ink supply part 120, detection part 140, and ambient air i are sequentially arranged from bottom to top, and ink supply part part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are formed on a single end clear from Figure 40(b) this single end surface is the one side surfa positioned in the front in installation direction F when ink cartrid regular installation position Therefore, because ink supply part 120, 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are provided such that the (located close to each other) on a single end surface remaining ink de 57, needle 49, and passage 54 which are required on the side of device 1, can be consolidated (located close to each other) onto a singl surface 56) If ink supply part 120 were provided on the bottom cartridge 14 and detection part 140 and ambient air intake part 130 on the side surface of ink cartridge 14, it would become necessar needle 49 on the bottom surface side of case 40 of refill unit 13 remaining ink detection sensor 57 and passage 54 on the side of th (back surface 56) of case 40, and
  • the pushing retaini of the door member 60 contacts the push part 200a forming a porti surface of the ink cartridge 14, pushing the ink cartridge 14 in t direction F
  • the door lock the door member 60 fits into the lock member fitting part 46 of the completing the installation of the ink cartridge 14 (the state of Figu middle point p illustrated in Figure 40 (c) is the central position i direction (height direction) of the ink cartridge 14
  • the position whe retaining member 61 pushes the push part 200a is a position includi point p of the ink cartridge 14 and extending below the middle poi words, the push part 200a is provided at a position above the ink s and below the ambient air intake part 130 in the vertical direct illustration and description of this will be omitted, when the state of reached, the tip of the swing arm mechanism 44b fits into the latch p 227a and retains the ink cartridge 14 through hole formed by
  • the pushing retaining member 61 is impell spring 66 as described above, it can stably retain the ink cartridge 14 cartridge 14 has been installed (or is being installed) in the refill unit force of the spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750 of the ink supply and the ambient air intake mechanism 510 act in the direction awa on which needle 49 is arranged (leftward in Figure 40» in the directi the installation direction)
  • the pushing retaining configured to have a greater elastic force than the elastic force ge spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able to stably cartridge 14 once it has been installed
  • the push par depressed by the pushing retaining member 61 is located substa middle between the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air int allowing a substantially uniform elastic force to be applied to the i 120 and the ambient air intake part 130 This is because the ink c retained at three points in the installation direction of the ink cart point at the front of the refill unit 13 (the pushing retaining membe points at the back of the refill unit
  • Figure 41 is a drawing il state with the ink cartridge 14 having been installed in the multifun Since Figure 41 is drawing for the purpose of explaining the operat supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction device 1 and the like have been om drawing
  • the needle 49 when the ink c installed in the multifunction device 1, the needle 49 is inserted thr surrounded by the sloping wall 606d of the supply cap 600, the insert the supply cap 600 and the ink flow path 615 of the supply joint 600 and the tip of the needle 49 contacts the valve bottom wall 621 of th 620, depressing the supply valve 620 As a result, the supply valve 6 from the joint contact part 613 of the supply joint 610, forming an ink needle 49 communicates with a discharge opening (not illust multifunction device 1 via ink extraction opening 52 and ink tube 53 in the tip of the needle 49, a cutout 49a is formed for securing an in that an ink flow path is secured by the cutout 49a even if the tip of contacts the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620
  • there is n spring flexible part 653 of the second supply spring 650 arranged o side of the supply slider 640 from the first supply spring 630 determine the flexing order of the first and second supply springs 6 other words, the first supply spring 630 with the flexed spring fle flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that when t inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second sup flexes thereafter
  • the height of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direct comprises dimensional error from the manufacturing of the various c the more components there are, the more likely that dimensional er becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of misalignment in th displacement when the supply slider 640 operates in the direction of ink supply mechanism 500
  • the inside diameter of t circumferential wall 641 and the outside diameter of the spring bot and 651 of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are substantially equal
  • second spring members 630 and 650 are arranged on the slider 644 of the supply slider 640
  • the external shap outer circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 is formed sl than the inside diameter of the ink supply element 116, since the va part 622a is formed outward from the valve outer circumferential supply valve 620, it becomes possible to prevent misalignment in t displacement when the supply valve 620 operates in the directio Therefore, tele
  • the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 also u deformation, forming an ink flow path K indicated by arrow K
  • the in is a flow path formed between the ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figu the valve outer circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 circumferential surface of the ink supply member 116 is also an ink fl
  • th part 613 has a structure cut out into a countersunk shape so the di the joint protruding part 614 in the direction of insertion of the ne transmitted directly to the tip 613a of the joint contact part 613 In ot tip 613a of the joint contact part 613 is hardly displaced in the directi but is slightly displaced in a direction away from the needle 49 T change of the supply joint 610 accompanying insertion of the needle the joint contact parts 613 are displaced away from each other Assu contact part 613 had a shape with a gently s
  • the ambient air intake mechanism 510 side will be des ambient air intake mechanism 510, when the ink cartridge 14 is i multifunction device 1, the valve opening part 721a of the ambient contacts the back surface 56 of the case 40, depressing the ambient ai a result, the ambient air valve 720 is moved away from the joint cont the ambient air joint 710 forming an ambient air intake path L as arrow L m the drawings Furthermore, when the valve opening pa ambient air valve 720 contacts and is depressed by the back surfac stroke part 714 of the ambient air joint 710 contacts the back surfa joint skirt part 714 undergoes flexible deformation so as to expand ( diameter As a result, it becomes tightly held against the back surfac flexible part 753 of the second ambient air spring 750 Thus, the fl determined for the first and second ambient air springs 730 and 750
  • the inside diameter of the valve outer circumferent the ambient air valve 720 and the inside diameter of the circumferential wall 741 of the ambient air valve 720 are formed to b equal
  • the inside d slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the outside diameters of the parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air spring member are formed to be substantially equal
  • valve outer circu 722 of the ambient air valve 720 is formed slightly smaller than the i of the ambient air intake element 117, since valve protruding part 7 outward from the valve outer circumferential wall 722 of the ambient misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient operates in the direction of axis 02 can be prevented Therefor operation in the direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mec stabilized
  • the ink flow path K and the ambient air int formed when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunc Furthermore the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and t intake mechanism 510 is such that they operate smoothly misalignment relative to the axes Ol and 02 Thus, installation of th 14 is made easier, while allowing the supply of ink and the intake of be carried out reliably
  • the attachment attachment shaft 472a of the sensor arm 470 and of the arm sandwi of the frame part 110, i e the position of the center (pivot) about wh arm 470 rotates, is arranged below the detection part 140 and above part 120, and is positioned to the rear (to the left in Figure 42 (a) and of the supply path forming part 420 in the direction of installati cartridge 14
  • the ink supply part 12 intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged together on one the ink cartridge 14 This allows the various mechanisms (ink supp ambient air intake mechanism and remaining ink detection mec arranged together on the refill unit 13 of the multifunction device 1 shape of the refill unit 13 from becoming complicated, and also red
  • the ink supply part 120 being a part which supplies in to flow out to the multifunction device 1 is preferably arranged at th the ink cartridge 14 so as to provide for more complete utilization of the ambient air intake part 130, being a part which takes in ambie ink cartridge
  • the top end surface o arm part 473c (the upper end surface in Figure 42) is positioned parallel to the liquid surface of the ink In this state, when the liquid ink drops and reaches the same position as the top end surface of the 473c, the surface tension of the ink acts as a force to retain the shieldi the force by which the surface tension of the ink retains the shieldi greater than the buoyancy of the balance part 473a, the sensor ar operate properly
  • the top end surface forming the detection part 140 of the shielding arm 473c is given an angle downward, reducing the portion of the shielding arm 473c that is the top and bottom are reversed relative to the proper installation o tips of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a will collide with protrusion 55
  • the mk supply part 120 When installed with the top and bottom reversed fr installation orientation, the mk supply part 120 will be located abo air intake part 130 resulting in an incorrect orientation (or a seco with respect to the proper installation orientation
  • the total projection distance t9 projection distance of the protrusion 55 from the back surface 56 of t the projection distance of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a fro is longer than the projection distance t8 of the needle 49 from the member 48 Providing a difference between projection distance t8 distance t9 prevents contact between the tip of the valve openi projecting outward from the ambient air intake part 130 and the tip o
  • the needle 49 is a member for extracting the ink inside the ink ca supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrated), so if where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately printing is not performed accurately Thus, it is not desirable for the damaged or deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve open
  • collision between the needle 49 opening part 721a can be prevented, thus making it possible to prev deformation of the needle 49 and allowing the ink to be reliably suppl
  • the position of the through hole (detection window) detected part 140 and the case cutouts 213 and 223 in the vertical up down direction in Figure 44) is displaced slightly from the center, the ink cartridge 14 is installed upside down from the prope orientation the remaining ink detection sensor 57 may collide with th multifunction device 1
  • Figure 46 is a drawing showing the state of removing the ink cartrid multifunction device 1 and a front view of the ink cartridge 14
  • Fig Figure 46 (b) are drawings illustrating the state change when the ink removed
  • Figure 46 (c) shows a front view of the ink cartridge 14
  • the ink cartridge 14 when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifuncti needle 49 is inserted inside the ink supply part 120
  • the ink supply mechanis ink cartridge 14 is removed the ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 may form of ink drops, or ink may flow down from the ink supply part 120
  • projection (first protruding part) consisting of the case projecting p 224a projects further outward (rightward in Figure 46 (b)) than the p the ink supply part 120, even if the ink adhering to the tip of the n down in the form of ink drops or if ink flows down from the ink suppl dripped ink can be made to adhere to the ink supply part 120 side case projecting parts 214a and 224a Furthermore since the case p 214a and 224a and the ink supply part 120 are positioned relativel other, it is easy to make the ink dripping from the ink supply part 12 case projecting parts 214a and 224a
  • the insertion hole 605 of the suppl ink supply opening into which the needle 49 is inserted and through out and the thickness til in the widthwise direction (the left rig Figure 46 (c)> the Z direction) of ink cartridge 14 of the case projecti and 224a is made longer than the diameter tlO of the insertion diameter of needle 49 is formed to be slightly narrower than the diam through hole 605 )
  • the Y insertion hole 605 is accommodated entirely within the region occupi projecting parts 214a and 224a
  • Figure 47 is a drawing illustrating the str 140
  • ink may spatter from the projecting supply part 120 or the projecting tip of the needle 49
  • t ink supply mechanism 500 of the ink supply part 120 opens and close of the elastic force of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 pressure of the ink changes rapidly upon installation and remo cartridge 14 causing the ink held inside the ink supply mechanism forcefully and the fact that when the needle 49 is suddenly exposed from the state of being positioned inside the ink supply part 120 ( where the ink cartridge 14 is installed), the ink may flow back and sp spattering of ink does not occur every time the ink cartridge 14 removed and most of the time no ink may spatter
  • the detection part 140 when the ink cartrid installation orientation, the detection part 140 is positioned corresponding to the remaining ink detection sensor 57, so the detect positioned above the ink supply part 120 (or needle 49) The majo spattering from the needle 49 and ink supply part 120 spatters down to the direction of detection part 140) under its own weight, so the adh the detection part 140 can be reduced simply by arranging the dete above the ink supply part 120 Furthermore, the detection surfaces are formed in a plane parallel to the line jointing the center of the dete and the cap insertion hole 605 (see Figure 47 Ob)) The majority of the from the cap insertion hole 605 spatters in substantially linear fash ink should spatter from the cap insertion hole 605, not much ink will detection surfaces 140a and 140b, making it possible to reduce the a to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b However, when the detection part 140 is in a state arranged belo air intake part 130 and above the ink supply part 120 (the state of the detection surfaces 140a
  • the detection part 1 inside the case 200 and a space into which the light emitting part receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57 enter is f sides of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b by the case cutouts 213 the detection part 140 is covered by the case 200, so even if ink s adhesion of the spattered ink to the detection surfaces 140a and reduced Moreover, since a portion of the ink supply part 120 projects projecting parts 214b and 224b extend further outward than the i 120 Thus, if the ink cartridge 14 is inadvertently dropped, the ink s can be prevented from contacting the surface, which the ink cartridg on, making it possible to reduce outflow of ink from the ink supply p the shock of contact As a result the adhesion of the ink to the det 140a and 140b can be reduced
  • Figure 48 is a drawing showing the front v 40 Figure 48 (a) is a front view of case 40, which can accommodate black or a black ink cartridges 14 and color ink cartridges 14, and Fi front view of case 2040, which can accommodate black ink cartridge ink cartridges 14
  • case 40 is arr multifunction device 1 but it is also possible to provide a multifu wherein case 2040 is arranged instead of case 40
  • Figure 49 is a cross showing the simplified cross section of cases 40 and 2040
  • Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is cross sectional view of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 49 shows a cross section of needle forming member 48 and in with the other elements making up the cases 40 and 2040 being om illustration Furthermore in Figures 48 to 50, a color ink cartridge is ink cartridge 14c a black ink cartridge is show as ink cartridge 14k capacity black ink cartridge is illustrated as ink cartridge 14k2
  • case 40 is configured to accomm cartridges so that they are aligned in case 40 Regarding the arran four ink cartridges, three color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14 14kl is arranged adjacent thereto In other words, just as in case 40 cartridge 14kl is accommodated at an end position in the direction o the ink cartridges (the left right direction in Figure 48 Ob))
  • case 40 Since case 40 allows both a large capacity black ink cartridge 14 mk cartridge 14kl to be installed, it is formed to accommodate the t large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 Thus, the lateral width tl4 the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2> the left in Figure 48 (a)) of case 40 is longer than the lateral width tl5 (th direction of alignment of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k 1, the left rig Figure 48 Ob))
  • the difference between the lateral width tl4 of ca lateral width tl5 of case 2040 corresponds to the difference betwee the vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of the second case member 220 Figure 11 and the height of the vertical wall parts 2220b to 222Oe of t member 2220 illustrated in Figure 13
  • case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14k 1 or a large mk cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 204 installation of black ink cartridge 14kl This implies providing users of multifunction device 1
  • case 204 installation of black ink cartridge 14kl This implies providing users of multifunction device 1
  • Furt case 2040 for installing black ink cartridges 14k 1 and case 40 for i capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 differ only slightly in external shap of the die used can be shared between the two, providing for a cost re
  • the needle improve the appearance of the coloration Although there is little change when color inks are mixed together, when black ink mixes color ink, the effect of color change becomes greater so it is not desi ink to be mixed with other color inks Furthermore, when mixing colors has been confirmed, generally, recovery processing (purging) i ejection of the ink is carried out, but since ink is wasted for the recov the ink utilization efficiency drops Moreover, since black ink is a pig it has higher viscosity compared to dye type ink, so it cannot be easily if recovery processing is carried out However, in the present embod cartridges
  • Figure 50 is a simplified cross section illustratin fashion the state of installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14kl and 14k2
  • Figure 50 (a) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14kl and 14c insta and Figure 50
  • Figure 50 (b) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14k2 and 1 case 40
  • accommodating g 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 capable respectively of accommodating the cas 216, 226 and 1216 and the case welded parts 217, 227 and 1217 of ca 1200
  • Accommodating grooves 42c 1 to 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 are all between distance tl2 and distance tl3 in the direction away from part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the other color ink cart left right direction m Figure 50)
  • the difference between distance tl tl3 is the same as the difference between gap tl6 and gap tl7 betw described above, and corresponds to the difference between the hig wall parts 210b to 21Oe of the first case member 210 illustrated in Fi height of vertical wall parts 2210b to 221Oe of the first case illustrated in Figure 13, or the difference between vertical wall parts the first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the vertical w to 121Oe of the first case member
  • a prescribed space X is formed between the outer second case 220 of the black ink cartridge 14kl and the inner surf plate part 43
  • This prescribed space X is formed to allow for the large ink cartridge 14k2 Namely, as illustrated in Figure 50 (b), it serve refill unit 13 to be used for both the black ink cartridge 14kl and the black ink cartridge 14k2
  • Figure 51 is a schematic d schematically illustrates the combination of case members 210, 220, 1 2220 case members 2210 and 2220 (the height of vertical wall parts 2210 2220b to 222Oe of the first and second case members 2210 and 2220 direction in Figure 5l(b)) being respectively tl9, which is approxim thickness of tl8
  • Figure 51 (c) is a schematic drawing of case 1200 Case 1200 com second case members 1210 and 220, with the thicknesses of the fi case members 1210 and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts 1210 220b to 22Oe of the first and second case members 1210 and 220, direction in Figure 5l(c)) being tl9 for the first case member 1210 a second case member 220
  • three types of cases - 2200 - with different sizes of the outer shape (different inside volum from two first case members of different thickness and two second ca different thickness
  • the thicknesses of second case members 210 and 220 forming case 200 are equal, and t of the first and second case members 2110 and 2220 forming case equal, but making the thicknesses equal in this manner is not an condition for forming three types of cases — 200, 1200 and 2200 — of shape sizes
  • the second case member 220 for common with the second case member 220 for color thus, a spe necessary for the second case member 220 for black, providing a red
  • the first case member 1210 for black merely involves m case member 210 for color deeper and providing a rib 1218
  • the vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe past the rib 1218 in the first case used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertical wall 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore, the first 1210 and 210 can be manufactured by using a common die for the the first case members 1201 and 210, and changing betwee corresponding to the first case member 210 and a member correspond case member 1210
  • costs can be reduced as compared to whe molds are fabricated
  • the first case member capacity black has the same shape as the first case member 1210 without the rib 1218 a common die can be used for the main portion o members 210, 12
  • cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from ea through holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air int project to the outside are made the same shape, and substantially sem cutout parts 211, 212, 221, 222, 1211 1212, 2211, 2212, 22 corresponding to one half of these through holes are formed substantially semi circular shape in the first case member 210, secon second case member of case 2200 Since the vertical wall parts 210 220b to 22Oe of case members 210 and 220 are formed to be substan height, and since the vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe and 220b t members 2210 and 2220 are formed to be substantially equal in heig shape sizes of the case 1200a and case 1200 are substantially the sa
  • Figure 52 a second embodiment will be describe a drawing illustrating the ink cartridge 3014 and refill unit 3013 embodiment
  • Figure 52 (a) is a drawing illustrating the side surf cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment
  • Figure 52 (b) shows th in the state with the ink cartridge 3014 installed in refill unit 3013
  • the ink cartridge 3014 of the secon is configured with a different location of the ambient air intake compared to the ink cartridge 14 of the first embodiment
  • ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge an ambient air intake passage 3131 formed in a labyrinth shape through hole 3130 formed on the top surface of the case 3200
  • the refill unit 3013 o embodiment is configured with the position of the pushing retaining provided on the door 41 being lower than the position of the pus member 61 provided on the door 41 of the first embodiment This is b no air intake part on the side surface opposite the pushing retaining the same line, reducing tilting of the ink cartridge 3014 and allowing installed
  • the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment may comprise a element 100 inside it, or may be configured such that ink is stored i 3200
  • Figure 53 is a perspective view illustrating the outward appeara cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments Fig perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of ink cartrid third embodiment and Figure 53 (b) is a perspective view illustratin appearance of ink cartridge 5014 of the fourth embodiment
  • the ink cartridge 4014 of the thir has a through hole 4130 for admitting ambient air into the ink c formed in a portion of its top surface (the top surface in Figure 5 admitted through this through hole 4130 passes through a labyrin intake passage 4131 (a relatively long passage with a small inside di admitted inside the ink cartridge 4014 A seal member 4132 is gl cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow of the ink inside th 4014 before use To use the ink cartridge 4014, the seal member 413 and then the cartridge is installed in the multifunction device 1
  • the detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting out end surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the 4014 (the up down direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is f supply part 4120
  • the ink car the third embodiment does not have a structure corresponding to element 100, and stores the ink directly inside the case port 4121 is formed
  • the partition wall 4125 that divides the in ink cartridge 4014 and the ink supply part 4120 is formed as a singl ink cartridge 4014 itself As illustrated in Figure 53(a), this parti forms a space to store the valve mechanism
  • the ink cartridge 5014 in the fou embodiment is used in lieu of the ink supply part 4120 in the thi embodiment, forming the ink supply part 120 of the first example and the similarly shaped ink supply part 5120
  • the remaining struct as the ink cartridge in the third example of embodiment, and therefor explanation of this will be omitted
  • the detection part 4140 of the third and fourth examples of e contain the sensor arm 470 inside it, as in the first example of em contains the sensor arm 470, then in the state where the ink cartri 5014 have been attached to the multifunction device 1 it is possibl detect the amount of ink remaining Also, in the third and fourt embodiment, the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed from the c parts 214a and 224b and the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed protruding parts 214b and 224b have been omitted, but it is accept these
  • Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 m the embodiment
  • Figure 55 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state i cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within the r case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment is constructed such that its ed different in relation to the case protruding parts 214a and 224a of the embodiment Therefore the structure other than the edge part of the case protr and 224a of the fifth example of embodiment is the same as that of the mk ca downwards, or in relation to the second case component 220, when seen fr Figure 54 looking upwards) (see Figure 55)
  • the steps 214a4 and 224a4 of the fifth example of embodiment a L shape (or V or U shape) as seen from the side but it is also acc them corresponding to the edge shape of the protrusion 55 In ot acceptable for it to be any shape desired as long as it is a shape tha loose when attaching it in the wrong orientation and the edge of th fitted into the steps 214a4 and 224a4
  • Figure 56 is a cross sectional diagram showing the sta ink cartridge 14 of the sixth example of embodiment has been inserte unit 13
  • Figure 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the elec of the multifunction device 1 in the sixth example of embodiment flow chart showing the ink cartridge attachment detection process t embodiment, there is an ink cartridge attachment detection sensor ink cartridge 14 has been attached to the correct attachment positi the case protruding parts 214a and 224a will press a protruding p cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 and by pressing this pr the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 will send a signal board 970
  • the control board 970 is a control device to perform the the multifunction device 1
  • the control board 970 includes a C is the calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory t overwritten and which stores the control program and the fixed valu 973 which is the memory that can be overwritten and which is use memory, the EEPROM 974 which is the non volatile memory overwritten and which stores data even after the power source is tur interface 975 which performs electrical connections between the ex and the control board 970, the mkjet printer 976 which perform discharging ink as instructed by the CPU 971, the liquid crystal d which performs each type of display the remaining ink detection se detects the amount of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and attachment detection sensor 960 that detects whether the ink cartrid attached or not, and the interface circuit 978 that performs input and type of signal While it is not illustrated in the figure there ar counters and timers included, the updating of the counter values an will be performed according to the processing performed within the C
  • ink cartridge attachment f ink cartridge attachment flag 974 will not only go on when the ink ca been correctly attached, it is a flag that will go off when the ink ca been removed Further, once the ink cartridge attachment flag 9 when the protruding piece is not pressed Also, the remaining ink d 57 will go on when the amount of light received by the light receivi below a certain level (when the light path between the light emittin the light receiving part 57b is obstructed), and it will go off when light received by the light receiving part 57b has exceeded a certain l light emitted from the light emitting part 57a is received by the light 57b)
  • the attachment detection sensor 960 is on (SlOl Yes)
  • the va cartridge attachment flag 974a should be 0 (S 104 No)
  • the r detection sensor 57 is off (S 105 No)
  • the multifunction device 1 When the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1, in no error has been detected, the multifunction device 1 will allow e printing process (not illustrated in the figure), and therefore, it is po execution of the printing process in the state in which it is unclear w cartridge 14 has been attached or not '
  • the ink cartridge attach sensor 960 will be turned off the value of the ink cartridge attach will be set to 0, and therefore, it is always possible to accurately dete ink cartridge 14 is attached or whether the ink is empty Also when ink cartridge 14 when ink is adhered to the light emitting part 5 receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, it accurately detect any abnormalities of the remaining ink detection s attaching the ink cartridge 14 Also when removing the ink cartridg cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is already broken, an ink will be displayed even though the ink cartridge 14 is not attached possible for the user to recognize that there has been some sor occurrence If an abnormal deletion operation is performed, then bec of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 0 in the even been attached), if the remaining ink detection sensor 57 changed
  • Figure 59 is an angled view showing the external the ink cartridges 6014 and 7014 of the seventh and eighth embodiment
  • Figure 59(a) is an angled view showing the external ap ink cartridge 6014 in the seventh example of embodiment
  • the ink cartridges 6014 and 7014 of th eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the sha surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will relation to the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourt embodiment Therefore the structure other than the side surfaces on supply parts 4120 and 5120 of the seventh and eighth examples of e formed is the same as the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the thi examples of embodiment and therefore the same references for the the same as in the third and fourth examples of embodiment will be explanation of these is omitted
  • the surface of the concave parts 610 the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 side is a sloped surface that is direction of the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120
  • this struct is adhered onto the detection parts 6140 and 7140, the ink will n withm the concave parts 6100 and 7100, making it possible to reduce of mk onto the detection parts 6140 and 7140
  • the detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the seventh and eight embodiment can also contain sensor arms inside as in the fir embodiment By using a sensor arm 470, it is possible to accurat amount of ink remaining when the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 are the multifunction device 1
  • Figure 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge 8014 13 of the ninth example of embodiment The same parts as in the fi embodiment have the same references attached and the explanation omitted Also, while the structure of the pullout member 65 of the d 60 in the ninth example of embodiment is different to that in the fi embodiment the explanation of this will be omitted
  • the ink cartridge 8014 of the nin embodiment has a pushing part 8200a that is configured to contac retaining member 61 of the door main body 60 and that protrude outside from the side surface 1 of the ink cartridge 8014
  • oth pushing part 200a of the first example of embodiment was one par range of the side surface 1 of the case 200
  • the pressing part 820 example of embodiment has the structure where there is a spec ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment
  • Figure 62 perspective view showing the ink cartridge 9014 of the tent embodiment
  • Figure 63 is a diagram to explain the procedure for re reservoir element
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the ten embodiment has a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 9100 is attached onto the maximum surface 220a and the vertical wa the second case member 220 and the vertical wall part 210c and surface 210a of the first case member 210
  • the seal 91 to the side surface opposing the protector 300 opposite the edge su the ink supply part 120 the ambient air intake part 130 and the dete are located
  • the seal 9100 not only has the model of the ink cartridge it, but it also has imprinted on it the color corresponding to the ink col is possible to visually recognize the color of the ink that is stored cartridge 9014 Therefore, by attaching this seal 9100, it is possible visually recognize the ink color, making it possible to prevent stor cartridge 9104 in the wrong accommodating chamber 50 withm the c parts 9200a and 9200b of the first case member 210 with the eng 9201a and 9201b of the second case member 920, the first case memb second case member 220 are joined
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has joining of the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 of the seal 9100 onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement ho 9201b , Therefore by undoing the union of the engagement parts 92 with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, it is possible to undo between the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 I simply perform the undoing of the connection between the engageme and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b by pressing t engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement holes 920 from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case cu to 223 have been formed
  • the seal part 9100 is a conn to connect the first and second case members 210 and 220, and it ser material, which can open and close the first and second case member Therefore the replacement of the ink reservoir element 100 is can easily undergo the replacement of the ink reservoir element 10 example of embodiment, because detection of the remaining ink ( attachment detection of the ink cartridge) is performed by the detection sensor 57 that is placed on both sides of the detection part reservoir element 100, if an ink cartridge 9104 with no ink reservoi contained is attached, then the determination will be made tha remaining ink (or that there is no ink cartridge attached) Therefor be no printing process performed by the multifunction device 1 in the an ink cartridge 9014 with no ink
  • Figure 64 the eleventh example of embod described Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir eleme eleventh example of embodiment
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 o example of embodiment is fixed within the first and second case me will omit a detailed explanation and description of the first an members
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 o example of embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is f injection moldemg using a resm material and a bag element flexibility and which forms a reservoir space to store the ink inside, connected to the hard part 9301
  • the hard part 9301 has a (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the light emittin the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 5 supply part including the ink supply mechanism 500 and the suppl first example of embodiment
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 of the elevent embodiment is manufactured using the hard part 9301 and the bag according to this reduction, and when the ink is depleted, the reservo mostly depleted as well Therefore, it is not possible to place a sensor member) to detect the amount of ink remaining within the bag part 9
  • the hard part 9301 in the ink reservoir element 9300 is light barrier properties and because it is placed between the light em and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection se always block the emitted light that is emitted from the light emit Therefore, while it is not possible to detect the amount of ink remain bag part 9302, it is possible to detect whether there is an ink reservoi contained withm the first and second case members, and therefore i prevent any printing processes from being performed by the multifu while the ink reservoir element 9300 is not contained within the fi case menbers
  • Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams modified examples of the combinations of the case members
  • the three types of cases 200, 1 and 2200 were formed with differing sizes for the outer shapes using of first case members 210 and first case members 1210 and 2210 thicknesses, and the two types of second case members 220 and secon
  • the thickness of the case member 121 is t21 and the thickness of th r22 is t 22, which is thicker than the thickness t21
  • the diffe the thickness t22 of the case member r22 and the thickness t21 of th r21 is different than the difference between the thickness t21 of th 121 and the thickness t20 of the case member 120
  • case C3 is formed of the case member 120 and th r22 and case C4 is formed of the case member 121 and the case mem
  • the case C3 is formed of the case member 120 and th r22
  • the case C6 is formed of the case member 121 and the cas
  • the difference between the thickness t20 of the case memb thickness t22 of the case member r22 is different than the differenc thickness t21 of the case member 121 and the thickness t20 of the cas fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
  • the small sca large scale case C2 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C6 ar the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases C2, C3, C5, and C6 ar with the relationship C5 ⁇ C6 ⁇ C3 ⁇ C2 Therefore, it is possible to fo with different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be st four case members 120 r21, 121 and r22
  • Figure 6 illustrated in Figure 67(a) is the same as the case Cl illustrated in explanation of this will be omitted here
  • Figure 67 (a) is formed of the case member 122and the case member r22
  • the thic case members 122 and r22 are formed of t22
  • the small sca large scale case C7 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C8 ar the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases Cl, C3 C7, and C8 a with the relationship Cl ⁇ C3 ⁇ C8 ⁇ C7 Therefore, it is possible to f with different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be st four case members 120, r21, 122 and r22
  • each c thickness of the case members that are placed on one side are diff thicknesses of the case members that are placed on the other side i form four cases with different outer sizes (different internal capac four case members
  • the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 ar direction of the supply joint 610 and the ambient air joint 710 to blo path K and the ambient intake path L
  • the coil spring is formed such that at of it is conical, then it is also possible to reduce the scale of t mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism
  • check valve 670 was constructed of the umbrell the shaft part 672, it is acceptable to construct it of only the umbrell check valve 670 is used to prevent backflow of the ink and therefore to construct it such that it can block the connection of the first cove 683 and the second cover through hole 684 of the cover 680 Also, it i construct the cover 680 without the second cover through hole 684
  • the ambient air c passage forming part 430 was constructed such that it sloped down the second ambient air communicating chamber 432 from the firs communicating chamber 431, but because one surface of the communicating passage 433 is constructed of a film 160, it is possible formation of a meniscus within the ambient air communicating Therefore, it is acceptable to have a construction in which the communicating passage forming part 430 does not necessarily slop and it is acceptable to have a construction in which it is horizontal in the ink cartridge 14 is attached
  • the welding of the case 200 can be substituted with attach adhesive as it is only important to ensure that the first and second 210 and 220 do not separate Industrial Applicability
  • the ink cartridge and the system of the present invention are w home and office uses

Landscapes

  • Ink Jet (AREA)
  • Pens And Brushes (AREA)

Abstract

An ink cartridge is configured to be horizontally inserted into an ink jet recording apparatus in a mounting direction. The ink cartridge includes an ink supplying part positioned on the front surface of the ink cartridge in the mounting direction for supplying ink from the ink cartridge to an ink jet recording apparatus. The ink cartridge also includes an irradiated part positioned on the front surface. The irradiated part is configured to be positioned between two portions of an optical sensor of the ink jet recording apparatus and to be positioned above the ink supplying part when the ink cartridge is mounted to the ink jet recording apparatus. The irradiated part includes a pair of opposing surfaces configured to face the two portions of the optical sensor respectively and the opposing surfaces extending substantially vertically when the ink cartridge is mounted to the ink jet recording apparatus.

Description

DESCRIPTION
INK CARTRIDGE, AND SYSTEM INCLUDING INK CARTRIDGE RECORDING APPARATUS Technical Field
The present invention is related to an ink cartridge, more sp ink cartridge which restricts erroneous detection by a transmission due to ink scattered when the ink cartridge is mounted to or remov jet recording apparatus, and to a system including an ink cartridge recording apparatus Background Art
Japanese Laid Open Patent Publication No 11 157097 di cartridge and an ink jet printer where the ink cartridge is inserte The ink cartridge has an ink outlet on a front surface with respect direction of the ink cartridge The ink jet printer has an ink supply inserted to the mk outlet of the ink cartridge and a cartridge detecto below the ink supply needle The cartridge detector detects that th is mounted to the ink jet printer When the ink cartridge is mounte printer horizontally, the ink supply needle is inserted to the ink o supply ink in the ink cartridge to the ink jet printer, and the cart contacts one surface of the ink cartridge and detects that the in mounted to the ink jet printer
In case that an optical sensor using a photodiode and the like cartridge detector, for example, an outer casing of the ink cartri transparent or semi transparent so as to detect that the ink cartridge the ink jet printer or detect an amount of residual ink in the ink cartr Disclosure of the Invention
However, if the ink cartridge is mounted to and removed fr formed and at a position below the ink outlet it may not be accuratel the ink cartridge is mounted to the ink jet printer or the amount of re not be correctly detected, which causes erroneous detection
It is an object of the present invention to provide an ink c restricts erroneous detection by a transmission optical sensor due t during mounting or removal of the ink cartridge to/from an ink jet pr
This object is solved by an ink cartridge according to clai system according to claim 13 Further developments are specified in claims
An ink cartridge is mounted horizontally to an ink jet record and the ink cartridge has an ink supplying part and an irradiated surface with respect to a mounting direction of the ink cartri supplying part has an opening where an extracting member enters part is positioned above the ink supplying part when the ink cartridge the ink jet printer and the irradiated part is positioned between the part and the light receiving part of the transmission optical sensor cartridge is mounted in the ink jet recording apparatus The irradi pair of opposing surfaces which face the light emitting part and the part of the transmission optical sensor respectively and the pai surfaces extends substantially vertically when the ink cartridge is ink jet recording apparatus Therefore, even if ink is scattered from the ink supplying part or the extracting member and adheres to the i when the ink cartridge is mounted to or removed from the ink jet p adhering to the opposing surfaces is likely to move downwards by it This is because the opposing surfaces extend substantially verticall even if ink adheres to the opposing surfaces, the ink adhering to surfaces moves downwards This restricts the fluctuation in an a jet recording apparatus
The ink supplying part and the irradiated part are both pos front side of the ink cartridge This allows space saving con comfortable handling of the ink cartridge
When the pair of opposing surfaces are planes which are pa connecting the opening of the ink supplying part and the irradi restricts that the ink scattered from the ink supplying part adheres t surfaces Ink is scattered straight from the opening of the ink s When the opposing surfaces are formed by planes which intersect connecting the opening of the ink supplying part and the irradiate scattered straight from the opening of the ink supplying part easily opposing surfaces On the other hand when the opposing surfaces planes which are parallel to the line connecting the opening of the part and the irradiated part, the opposing surfaces do not intersec scattered straight from the opening of the ink supplying part Th adhering to the opposing surfaces Since the opposing surfaces ar plane each, the ink adhering to the opposing surfaces smoothly flow the opposing surfaces which have rough surfaces
When the ink supplying part projects farther frontward f surface of the cartridge, and the opening is formed at the distal e supply part the opening of the ink supplying part is positioned fart than the irradiated part In other words, the irradiated part is form front surface of the ink cartridge than the opening of the ink s Therefore, the opening of the ink supplying part is positioned relative irradiated part This restricts that ink scattered from the openi supplying part adheres to the irradiated part
The irradiated part may have a front surface connectin scattered when the ink cartridge is mounted to or removed from the it is restricted that the scattered ink adheres to the opposing surface
The ink storing member including at least a part of ea supplying part and the irradiated part may be covered with the the front surface of the casing is provided with a first penetration op part of the ink supplying part extends to the outside and a seco opening in which the irradiated part is accommodated, since the irr provided in the casing, it is restricted that ink adheres to the opposin
A moving member which moves in response to a decrease i ink in the ink cartridge can be disposed withm an ink storing chambe the moving member may be disposed within the inner space of the i In this case, when the moving member moves as the ink amount amount of light received by the light receiving part of the trans sensor is changed Accordingly the amount of residual ink in t chamber is detected The opposing surfaces of the irradiated part ar that the ink adhering to the inner surfaces of the opposing surfaces i downwards Therefore, the amount of residual ink in the ink storin be precisely detected according to the movement of the moving memb
The moving member may have a light blocking member, whic at one end of the moving member and disposed within the inne irradiated part a floating member which is positioned at another en member and moves according to the amount of residual ink in t chamber, and a support member, which is positioned between the sh and the floating member The moving member may be a rotation m rotatable around the support member In this case, when the flo moves as the amount of residual, ink decreases, the light blocking me around the support member Accordingly, the amount of light re part, the irradiated part and the atmosphere introducing part are a order from bottom to top on the front surface Therefore, the mechanism, the transmission optical sensor, the atmospher mechanism and the like are intensively arranged in the ink jet record In other words, if the ink supplying part, the irradiated part and t introducing part are all arranged on the front surface in the mountin ink cartridge can be formed in a space saving way
A pair of protruding portions may be formed on the front s protrude outwardly from the front surface farther than the ink supp the atmosphere introducing part protrude The ink supplying atmosphere introducing part are positioned between the pair of protr If the ink cartridge is dropped, the protruding portions strike the gro ink supplying part and the atmosphere introducing part do not stri Since the ink supplying part is a part which supplies ink ink may be the opening of the ink supplying part In this case, if the ink s directly strikes the ground ink may scatter from the ink supplying p the protruding portions restrict that ink is scattered from the ink s Accordingly, it is also restricted that ink adheres to the opposing s irradiated part Brief Description of Drawings FlG 1 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the device of the present invention FlG 2 is an angled diagram of the refill unit
FIG 3 is a side view showing the state in which the door of the refill opened
FlG 4 is a cross sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figu IV IV line cross sectional diagram of the protector m Figure 9(a) along th
FlG 10 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of cartridge
FlG 11 is an angled diagram showing the details of the black ink car
FlG 12 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the black ink cartridge
FlG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large cap cartridge
FlG 14 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is the ink reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink rese
FlG 15 is a diagram showing the supply path formation part, diagram showing a summary of the supply path formation pa of the frame part), (b) is a cross sectional diagram showing t formation part in Figure 15(a) along the XVb XVb line, (c) showing the state in which the amount of ink has been reduc diagram showing the completion of the ink supply
FlG 16 is a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part, angled diagram showing a summary of the ambient air path f (b) is a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part i along the arrow XVIb perspective, and (c) is a diagram showin air path formation part in Figure 16(a) along the arrow XVIc p
FlG 17 is a diagram showing the injection path formation part, diagram showing a summary of the injection path formation a cross sectional diagram of the injection path formation part i along the XVIIb XVIIb line
FlG 18 IS a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) showing a summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a showing one side of the front of the ink reservoir elemen cross sectional diagram of Figure 20(a) along the XXc XXc lin
FlG 21 is a diagram showing the details of the ink reservoir eleme
FlG 22 is an exploded diagram of the ink supply mechanism and t intake mechanism, where (a) is an exploded diagram of t mechanism and (b) is an exploded diagram of the ambi mechanism
FlG 23 is a diagram showing the supply cap where (a) is a diagra side of the supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surfac cap in Figure 23(a) along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) showing the planar surface of the supply cap (d) is a diagra bottom surface of the supply cap, and (e) is a cross sectional supply cap in Figure 23(c) along the XXIIIe XXIIIe line
FlG 24 is a diagram showing the supply joint, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply joint (b) is a diagram showing the planar supply joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of th and (d) is a cross sectional diagram of the supply joint in Fig the XXIVd XXIVd line
FlG 25 is a diagram showing the supply valve, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply valve, (b) is a diagram showing the side of th in Figure 25(a) along the arrow XXVb perspective, (c) is a dia the planar surface of the supply valve, (d) is a diagram showi surface of the supply valve and (e) is a cross sectional diagra valve in Figure 25(c) along the XXVe XXVe line
FlG 26 is a diagram showing the first supply spring, where (a) showing the side of the first supply spring, (b) is a diagra planar surface of the first supply spring, (c) is a diagram show 1
8
FlG 28 is a diagram showing the valve seat, where (a) is a diagra side of the valve seat, (b) is a diagram showing the planar valve seat, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the (d) is a cross sectional diagram of the valve seat in Figure 2 XXVIIId XXVIIId line
FlG 29 is a diagram showing the check valve, where (a) is a diagra side of the check valve, (b) is a diagram showing the planar check valve, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of t and (c) is a cross sectional diagram of the check valve in Fig the XXIXd XXIXd line
FlG 30 is a diagram showing the cover, where (a) is a diagram sho the cover, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the diagram showing the bottom surface of the cover and (d) is a diagram of the cover in Figure 30(b) along the XXXd XXXd lin
FlG 31 IS a diagram showing the ambient air cap, where (a) is a dia the side of the ambient air cap, (b) is a diagram showing t ambient air cap in Figure 3l(a) along the arrow XXXIb pers diagram showing the planar surface of the ambient air cap, ( showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cap, cross sectional diagram of the ambient air cap in Figure 3 XXXIe XXXIe line
FlG 32 is a diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) showing the side of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram show surface of the ambient air joint, (c) is a diagram showing the of the ambient air joint, and (d) is a cross sectional diagram air joint in Figure 32(b) along the XXXIId XXXIId line
FlG 33 is a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a dia diagram showing the welding surface of the film onto the fra is a diagram showing the welding process to weld the film part
FlG 37 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that after the film welding, where (a) is a diagram showing t process to attach the ink supply mechanism and the ambi mechanism onto the frame part, (b) is a diagram showing reducing process and (c) is a diagram showing the ink injectio
FlG 38 is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, diagram showing the process to sandwich the frame part by t is a diagram showing the welding process to weld the case
FlG 39 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that prior to shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagra process to attach the protective cap, and (b) is a diagram showi to package the ink cartridge using the packaging unit
FlG 40 is a diagram showing the method of attaching the ink ca multifunction device
FlG 41 is a diagram showing the state in which the ink cartri attached to the multifunction device
FlG 42 is a diagram showing the operation of the sensor arm corres amount of ink remaining within the ink reservoir chamber, w the state in which there is ink remaining and (b) shows the there is no ink remaining
FlG 43 is a diagram showing the operation theory of the diagrammatically
FlG 44 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the has been attached to the multifunction device 1 in the wrong o the ink cartridge, and (c) is an angled view of the ink cartridg
FlG 48 is a diagram showing the front of the case where (a) is a fr case that can store either the large capacity blank ink cartrid ink cartridge and the color ink cartridge, and (b) is a front v that can store the black ink cartridge and the color ink cartri
FlG 49 is a cross sectional diagram showing a summary of the cros case, where (a) is a cross sectional diagram showing a summ in Figure 48(a) along the XXXXIXa XXXXIXa line, cross sectional diagram showing a summary of the case in Fig the XXXXIXb XXXXIXb line
FlG 50 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which eac has been attached withm the case
FlG 51 is a diagram showing the combination of the c diagrammatically
FlG 52 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit ac second example of embodiment where (a) is a diagram show the ink cartridge according to the second example of embodime diagram showing the cross section of the state in which the in been attached within the refill unit
FlG 53 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the third and fourth examples of embodiment, angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the third example of embodiment, and (b) is an a showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment
FlG 54 is an angled diagram showing the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment FlG 58 is a flowchart showing the ink cartridge attachment detecti is executed by the CPU FlG 59 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the seventh example of embodiment, and (b) diagram showing the external appearance of the ink cartridg the eighth example of embodiment FlG 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit ac ninth example of embodiment FlG 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the tenth example of embodiment FlG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartrid the tenth example of embodiment
FlG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the ink FlG 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to example of embodiment
FlG 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
FlG 66 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
FlG 67 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention
Preferable embodiments of the present invention will be descr with reference to the attached drawings Figure 1 is an oblique vie appearance of multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 used as a recording medium based on image data or document data computer Multifunction device 1 can also be connected to an external a digital camera (not illustrated in the figure) such that it recor outputted from the digital camera to recording paper Moreover, by us multifunction device 1 can communicate with a device of another p image data to the device of the other party Furthermore, multifunct equipped with slot part 23, which is described below, and by loading v recording media such as memory cards into this slot part 23, the de data such as image data recorded on the recording medium to recordi
In multifunction device 1, printer part 11 is configured as an m device, and refill unit 13, which stores ink that is supplied to a recor illustrated in the figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is e base of the front surface of multifunction device 1 Refill unit 13 design and is configured such that ink cartridge 14 can be easily rep will be described in detail below
Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15 which functi (Flatbed Scanner), and document cover 16, which is provided on the this document bed 15 (top of figure l) Document cover 16 is automatic document feeder (ADF Auto Document Feeder, called "A 17, and it is attached to the back side of document bed 15 (back si using a hinge such that it can be freely opened and closed Theref cover 16 is opened and closed by rotating in the direction of arrow A document bed 15 In this embodiment, document bed 15 constitutes a housing of multifunction device 1, and document cover 16 constitut the top surface of multifunction device 1
Document bed 15 is equipped with a contact glass sheet (not illu figure) between the document bed and document cover 16 and it is configuration that is not equipped with ADF 17 may also be configuration, document cover 16 is opened by the user, and docume on the contact glass sheet
Printer part 11 is equipped with an image recording part that recording head (not illustrated in the figure), and this is configure recording device Printer part 11 is equipped with refill unit 13 on t multifunction device 1 (front side of Figure l) and on the b multifunction device 1 (bottom side of Figure l) In other words, r built in to the front surface Ia side and the bottom surface Ib side o device 1 In this embodiment, refill unit 13 is configured such that it hold four ink cartridges 14, and black, yellow, magenta, and cyan stored in each of these ink cartridges 14 The ink of each color cartridges 14 is supplied to the recording head through ink tube 53 (s
Moreover opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes openin the end of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure l) is p front surface of refill unit 13 (front of Figure l) Opening/closin configured such that it can be freely rotated between a position in w re nil unit 13 through opening 21 and a position in which it closes o houses refill unit 13 by folding it over to the front (front direction in
Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifun and a paper feed tray (not illustrated in the figure) is positioned insi 22 (in Figure 1, the state in which the paper feed tray is disengaged After the recording paper that is sent from the paper feed tray is se side, it is sent to the top and finally fed to the front side, and image onto the recording paper while the recording paper is fed The reco then discharged to a paper ejection tray (not illustrated in the provided on the upper part of the paper feed tray inside opening 22 commands from the various operation keys 31 34 the control de commands from receiver 2 described above and controls the multifunction device 1 Further, in cases in which a device such computer is connected to multifunction device 1, the control devic operation of multifunction device 1 based on instructions sent fro computer in addition to the instructions from operation panel 30
Slot part 23 through which recording media such as various small can be loaded is equipped on the bottom of operation panel 30 (botto Image data is stored on the small memory card, and the image data ( related to image data) that is read out from the small memory card i liquid crystal display part 35 The device is configured such that ar displayed on liquid crystal display 35 can then be recorded to recordi operation of operation panel 30
Next, refill unit 13 will be described with reference to Figures 2 6 oblique view of refill unit 13 Figure 3 is a side view of the state in w refill unit 13 has been opened Figure 4 is a cross sectional view o through line IV IV of Figure 2, and the state in which ink cartridges 1 is illustrated Figure 5 is a cross sectional view of refill unit 13 thro Figure 2 and the state in which ink cartridges 14 are installed is illu 6 is an exploded perspective view of door 41 of refill unit 13 Fi illustrate the state in which needle forming member 48 is removed
As illustrated in Figure 2, refill unit 13 is primarily equipped wit which ink cartridges 14 are inserted and removed, and door 41, whic to this case 40 Case 40 is formed into a roughly rectangular paralle whole, and, as illustrated in Figure 4, accommodating chambers 50 ( that house and hold ink cartridges 14 are partitioned and formed on this embodiment, case 40 has four accommodating chambers 50, plate part 44 that is positioned such that it spans the space between part 43, and the mside of accommodating chambers 50 is further partition wall parts 47 (see Figure 4) for partitioning each accommod 50 The number of these partition wall parts 47 arranged is dete number of ink cartridges 14 housed in case 40, and the positions in arranged are determined by the thicknesses of ink cartridges 14 direction As illustrated in Figure 4, partition walls 47 are formed provided from the top and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling Further, partition wall parts 47 do not need to completely accommodating chamber 50 so they may be of any shape as long protrudes to the inside from at least one of bottom plate part 42 or cei 44 and divides the space between adjacent accommodating chambers
Moreover, as illustrated in Figure 2 cutout part 40a (opening opened is formed on the back side of case 40 (back right side of Figure forming member 48 is fitted into this cutout part 40a Needle member) that extracts the ink inside mk cartridges 14 is formed on member 48 based on the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in a chambers 50 of case 40
As illustrated in Figure 5, needle 49 extends along the direction o case 40 and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installatio the state in which needle forming member 48 is engaged with cu When an ink cartridge 14 is installed in an accommodating chamber 49 is inserted into ink supply part 120 (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge supply path is formed as supply valve 620 (see Figure 22) of ink supp 500 (see Figure 22) is pressed Needle 49 communicates with ink extr 52 that projects upward on the back side of case 40 (right side of Fig tube 53 is connected to this ink extraction opening 52 Ink tube 53 is c Figure 5) is formed on the top of passage 54 This protrusion protrusion that is fitted into case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 d (see Figure 8) Moreover, when an ink cartridge 14 is about t upside down, the upside down insertion of ink cartridge 14 is pre protrusion 55 A detailed description of this prevention of the backwa ink cartridge 14 is given below A detailed description of the internal s cartridge 14 is also given below
On the back side of case 40, remaining ink detection sensor 57, wh height of the ink liquid level (remaining ink) inside ink cartridge between needle 49 and passage 54 This remaining ink detection transmissive optical sensor that has light emitting part 57a and light 57b, and it is provided according to the number of ink cartridges accommodating chambers 50 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is position corresponding to detection part 140 (see Figure 8) of ink cart state in which ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accommodating cha is arranged in a position in which light emitting part 57a and light 57b can sandwich both sides of detection part 140 of ink cartridge 14 accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b)) Remaining ink detec is connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink sto cartridge 14 is constantly monitored by this control device
Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves case 40 Further ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm m A tension spring is attached between swing arm mechanism 44b an part 44, and swing arm mechanism 44b is always elastically biased i of door 41 (front left side of Figure 2, left side of Figures 3 5) Swing a 44b is configured such that the ends that project into case 41 (a chamber 50) engage with latch parts 217a and 227a (see Figure 8) o Door 41 opens and closes opening 45, and is provided on each o position of door 41 switches between a position in which it clos (blocked position) as with the 1st, 3rd and 4th door 41 from the back in position in which it opens opening 45 (open position), as with the 2n the back left in Figure 2, and opening 45 can thereby be opened an door 41 is in the blocked position, ink cartridge 14 is reliabl accommodating chamber 50, and when door 41 is in the open position 14 can be easily inserted into and removed from accommodating cha
Here, the structure of door 41 will be described in detail with refer 6 Door 41 is equipped with door main body 60, pressing retaining m is provided on this door main body 60, door lock member 62 (lock ba (locks) door 41 to case 40, and lock release lever 63 that releases do fastened state Door main body 60, pressing retaining member 61, doo 62, and lock release lever 63 are each molded using resins
As illustrated in Figure 6, door mam body 60 is roughly formed the shape of a long and thin rectangle The external shape of door m formed according to the shape of opening 45 of case 40 Rotating which is supported on the lower part of the front surface of case 40, is bottom end of door main body 60 (bottom side end in Figure 6) Speci part 42a is formed on the front end of bottom plate part 42 of case 40 3 and 4), and rotating shaft part 64 is fitted into this bearing part 4 can rotate freely As a result door mam body 60 can close opening 45 or open opening 45 by folding over
Pullout member 65, which is formed as a unit with door mai provided on the bottom end of door main body 60 This pullout roughly formed into an L shape,' and it has extension part 65a and cu Extension part 65a is successively provided on the bottom end of door part 64 as a rotational center When door 41 changes to the open illustrated in Figure 3), curved part 65b of pullout member 65 r rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational center At this time, as a result of curved part 65b, outer wall surface 65c changes from a state in roughly perpendicularly (state illustrated in Figure 4) to a roughly h (state illustrated in Figure 3) The length of extension part 65a of p 65 is set to a prescribed dimension, so when curved part 65b is rota surface 65c is slightly higher than installation surface 51 of case 40 parallel to installation surface 51
Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides i onto installation surface 51 inside accommodating chamber 50 in the door 41 is in the open position As a result, pullout member 65 functi a member for pulling ink cartridge 14 out of accommodating chamber a guiding member when inserting ink cartridge 14 into accommodati
In this embodiment, two pullout members 65 are provided on e body 60 In other words, pullout members 65 are configured such positioned opposite the width direction of door main body 60 an cartridge 14 by sandwiching it in the width direction Moreover, in th the spacing between each of the pullout members 65 is set to be sm width direction of ink cartridge 14
Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member protrudes to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodati which claw 61a is housed, is provided on door main body 60 Claw a part 60a is configured from a groove that extends in a direction t perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of door main body 60 (ve in Figure 6) Claw 61a is fitted into claw accommodating part 60a s slide freely, so pressing retaining member 61 is supported such that When door 41 is in the blocked position, pressing retaining me contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 and is displaced t position side as it is relatively pressed by ink cartridge 14 (state Figure 4) As a result ink cartridge 14 receives the elastic force of through pressing retaining member 61 and is pressed against the b 40 (back side of the direction in which ink cartridge 14 is installed) cartridge 14 is held in a state in which it is positioned with respect to
In this embodiment, pressing retaining member 61 is formed in flat plate, while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 6 makes contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when doo blocked position) is formed into a flat surface and a pair of projecti formed on this wall surface 61b Therefore, when door 41 is in the bl these strips 61c make contact with and press against the side cartridge 14
Moreover, pressing retaining member 61 is configured such tha blocked position, it presses slightly downward from the center p vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 (vertical direction in Figure 4) I pressing retaining member 61 is provided in a position in which it and presses downward from the center position in the vertical d cartridge 14 This is for the purpose of improving the operationally which the user operates door 41 For example, when pressing retaini is positioned at or above the center position in the vertical direction o 14, the user operates door 41 by holding it in the vicinity of lock rele the distance between the part that is operated by the user and retaining member 61 becomes small Therefore the force induced by of pressing retaining member 61 becomes large, and a force that is l operate door 41 therefore becomes necessary On the other hand, position m the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartri installed or held correctly and can be installed smoothly with a s force Further, slightly below the center position in the vertical d cartridge 14 means that the center of the vertical direction of pres member 61 is positioned even lower than the center in the vertical cartridge 14, and as long as this positional relationship is maintain the top end of pressing retaining member 61 (upper edge of Figure 4) the center position of ink cartridge 14
Moreover, as will be described below, ink cartridge 14 of this equipped with ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 1 surface opposite the side surface that makes contact with pres member 61 and this ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake equipped with valve mechanisms having an elastic force In other wo a biasing force (first and second supply springs 630 and 650 and fi ambient air springs 730 and 750) that presses the valves (supply ambient air valve 720) outward such that they block communicatio interior and exterior or ink cartridge 14 Therefore, in order to r communication between ink cartridge 14 and the exterior, the e pressing retaining member 61 of this embodiment is set such that it the elastic force of the valve mechanisms of ink supply part 120 a intake part 130 As a result when ink cartridge 14 is in accommodating chamber 50, the ink inside ink cartridge 14 is reliabl ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink cartridge 14 Moreo part 120 is on the bottom end and ambient air intake part 130 is on the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in accommodating pressing retaining member 61 presses against a position that is rel the center position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 main shaft part 62a (lower side of Figure 6)
Door lock member 62 is supported such that it can advance and vertical direction with respect to door main body 60 (vertical directio Slide rail 60b extends in the vertical direction on the top end of door Slide groove 62d which extends in the vertical direction, is provided part 62a of door lock member 62 Slide rail 60b of door main body 60 i this slide groove 62d, and door lock member 62 is configured such th slide up and down
Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key pa shaft part 62a When door lock member 62 is fitted into door main un is housed in claw accommodating part 60c provided on door main bod accommodating part 60c is configured from a groove that extend prescribed length in the vertical direction Therefore when door lo slides upward or downward claw 62e makes contact with the inside claw accommodating part 60c, and the sliding of door lock member 62 direction is thus restricted
The sliding range of door lock member 62 is denned as a result o the length of the groove that constitutes claw accommodating prescribed dimension When door lock member 62 slides upward door main body 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the top edge of t surface of claw accommodating part 60c, door lock member 62 is in which it projects upward from the upper end of door main body 60 member 62 slides downward with respect to door main body 60 and cl contact with the bottom edge of the inside wall surface of claw accom 60c, door lock member 62 is in the position in which it retreats to the main body 60 In this specification, the position at which door loc makes contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw a " slopes downward Therefore, when door 41 changes from the open blocked position, the top surface of door lock member 62 makes conta edge of opening 45 of case 40, and when door 41 is rotated towar position, door lock member 62 retreats to the inside of door main b relatively pressed against the top edge of opening 45 When door 41 t changes to the blocked position, door lock member 62 once again proj main body 60, and key part 62b engages with the top edge of case 40
At this time, key part 62b of door lock member 62 is in a state fitted into lock member fitting part 46 (see Figures 2 and 5), which the top edge of opening 45 of case 40 Door lock member 62 is elastica that it always projects from door main body 60 due to coil spring 67, inside lock member fitting part 46 but the position of door lock me intermediate position such that it retreats slightly more to the retr side than the projecting side Door lock member 62 is always elas against lock member fitting part 46 when it is in the intermediate p lock member 62 never easily deviates from lock member fitting part
Lock release lever 63 is formed into the shape of a rectangular attached to the top of the outside of door mam body 60 in a state fastened to case 40 Door main body 60 is equipped with accommod which houses lock release lever 63 This accommodating part 6Od concave part that is provided on door main body 60 This will be de and when lock release lever 63 changes positions, lock release lever 6 accommodating part 6Od
Supporting pin 63a is provided on the bottom end of lock release l same time, pin support hole 6Oe, into which supporting pin 63a is fitt on door main body 60 Because supporting pin 63a is fitted into this pi 6Oe, lock release lever 63 is configured such that it can rotate free release lever 63 is inclined at approximately 45° is defined as the "ne while the position of lock release lever 63 when it is folded over rough is defined as the "folded position"
The bottom end of lock release lever 63 is interlocking cam 63b, a cam 63b is for sliding door lock member 62 up and down when the release lever 63 changes Because interlocking cam 63b is provid release lever 63 is rotated from the housed position through the ne and to the folded position, door lock member 62 slides from the proj through the intermediate position, and to the retreated position Put around, when door lock member 62 is in the projected position, lock r is placed in the housed position and door 41 is closed, and in the stat lock member 62 makes contact with lock member fitting part 46 o release lever 63 can be freely displaced between the housed position a position At this time, the central position of lock release lever 63 is s always moves to the neutral position due to its own weight Becau lever 63 arrives m the neutral position due to its own weight, it improve the operationahty into the folded position
Here, the outline of the operation of lock release lever 63 will Interlocking cam 63b of lock release lever 63 makes contact with s door lock member 62 In the state in which door 41 is closed (state Figure 4) lock release lever 63 attempts to further rotate door lo through interlocking cam 63b in a direction pressing downward How member 62 is always elastically biased upward by coil spring 67 member 62 is not displaced by the action of the weight of lock release and door lock member 62 is maintained in the intermediate position
However, when lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for exam in which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates an Door lock member 62 constantly receives the elastic force of coil the rotational force that acts upon lock release lever 63 disappears - if the user releases his or her hand from lock release lever 63 - door l arrives in a position in which it projects most from door main bod release lever 63 is forcibly displaced to the housed position In othe door 41 is in the open position, lock release lever 63 is in the positio almost completely housed mside door main body 60 Therefore, whe cartridge 14, because lock lever 92 is almost completely housed in unit 60, rotating is possible with rotating shaft part 64 as the cente the point that door 41 is nearly horizontal, so the user can easi cartridge 14 Moreover the two strips 61c that are provided on wall pressing retaining member 61 also operate as guides when housing i inside accommodating chamber 50 in cooperation with a guide part b parts 65b In other words, when ink cartridge 14 is to be accommodating part 50, the user may load the bottom surface of in onto strips 61c, place the tip part of ink cartridge 14 between curved then press ink cartridge 14 in the direction of accommodating chamb when ink cartridge 14 is to be removed from accommodating chamb should remove it until the bottom surface of ink cartridge 14 reac strips 61c from between curved parts 65b
When multifunction device 1 is in normal use door 41 of refill u and lock release lever 63 is placed in the neutral position Therefore, in Figure 1, when opening/closing cover 20 is opened when replacin 14, lock release lever 63 slopes to the front surface side As a resu advantage that the user can easily operate lock release lever 63 I illustrated in Figure 1, refill unit 13 is placed on front surface Ia of device 1, so if lock release lever 63 is placed in the neutral position (if 21, the inside wall surface of opening/closing cover 20 makes con release lever 63 when opening/closing cover 20 is closed, and when o cover 20 is completely closed, lock release lever 63 is displaced position as it is pressed by opening/closing cover 20 Therefore, in thi a compact design for multifunction device 1 can be realized
Next, ink cartridges 14 that are used in this embodiment will be reference to Figures 7 to 13 Ink cartridges 14 are for the purpose of advance, and cyan, magenta, yellow and black colored ink is stor cartridge 14 However, with regard to the structure of each ink ca cartridge 14 that stores black ink is formed such that it is slightly th ink cartridges 14 that store the other colors of ink This is because t black ink is generally the highest and it is expended in large quantiti black ink consists of pigmented inks, while colored inks consist of when black ink is mixed with colored ink, large quantities of colore expended for the recovery process Therefore, the external shape of t formed into a large shape such that colored ink and black ink c confirmed Moreover, the structures of ink cartridges 14 that store c all formed into the same shapes
First colored ink cartridges 14 for storing colored ink will be reference to Figures 7 to 9 Figure 7 is an oblique view showin appearance of a colored ink cartridge 14 Figure 8 is an exploded obli colored ink cartridge 14 Figure 9 is a diagram showing protector 30 top surface view of protector 300 from the perspective of IXa in Figur a cross sectional view of protector 300 through line IXb IXb in Figu following description, the X direction indicates the longitudinal di cartridge 14 (case 200 ink reservoir element 100) the Y direction height direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir element (see Figure 8), and protector 300, which is attached to this case 200 a reservoir element 100 when ink cartridge 14 is fed As is clear from 200 is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped that contains a surfaces 210a and 220a that oppose one another (cases 1200 and below are the same) In this embodiment ink reservoir element protector 300, and all of the members contained in ink cartridge 14 d are formed from resin materials and do not contain metal materials, burned at the time of disposal For example, nylon, polyester or pol be used as resin materials
As illustrated in Figure 8, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily frame part 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores i and reservoir space including mk reservoir chamber 111), ink su which supplies ink stored in this frame part 110 to multifunction Figure l), ambient air intake part 130, which introduces ambient part 110, detection part 140 (irradiated part) which is provided in the amount of remaining ink stored inside frame part 110, ink dispe which dispenses ink into frame part 110, and film 160, which is welde of frame part 110 (both top and bottom surfaces in Figure 8) in order reservoir chamber on frame part 110 Descriptions of frame part 1 part 120 ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140 ink dispe and film 160 and the manufacturing process for ink reservoir eleme given below
Case 200 comprises two case elements 210 and 220 that sandwic element 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8, Z d case member 210 is a member that covers the bottom side surface o element 100 in Figure 8, and second case element 220 is a member t top side surface of ink reservoir element 100 in Figure 8 First an become small, so it would be possible to reduce the damage of case 20
First case member 210 comprises a plate shaped part that forms 210a and vertical wall parts 210b 21Oe that are provided in roug directions (vertical directions and Z direction in Figure 8) from t portions of the four sides of this plate shaped part Regarding vert 21Od 21Oe, the vertical wall that forms the protector 300 side of firs
210 is 210b, the vertical wall that is placed opposite this vertical wa 210c, and the vertical walls that are respectively connected to vert 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe (the right side vertical wall part 21Od and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical wall p
Two case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing i 120 and ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 vertical wall part 210b of first case member 210 Case cutout parts 2 formed into roughly semicircular shapes from the edges of vertical and case cutout part 211 on the right front side of Figure 8 is a cutout to ink supply part 120, while case cutout part 212 on the left back sid a cutout corresponding to ambient air intake part 130 Rectangular c 213, which is cut out into a rectangular shape, is formed between ca
211 and case cutout part 212 and this is a cutout for inserting detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) to the position at which it sandwi part 140 Contact groove 211a, which makes contact with ink supp formed on the inside surface connecting to case cutout part 211 of firs 210, and contact groove 212b which makes contact with ambient 130, is formed on the inside surface connecting to case cutout part 2 member 210 Because these contact grooves 212a and 212b are alignment of ink reservoir element 100 with first case member 210 be
Moreover two case projecting parts 214a and 214b, which slopes in the direction of case cutout parts 211 to 213 (direction of th case member 210) towards the edge from the portion that connects surface of vertical wall part 21Od of the case member 210 (protector left front direction in Figure 8) When ink cartridge 14 is to be multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), it is installed such that case 214a is on the bottom side As a result, in the case in which ink installed when sloping surface 214a2 makes contact with bottom refill unit 13, ink cartridge 14 is smoothly led to the prescribed instal due to its slope
On case projecting part 214a, case projecting cutout part 214al, into a rectangular shape, is formed on the inside surface that forms t cutout parts 211 to 213 On case projecting part 214b, Case projecti 214bl which is also cut out into a rectangular shape, is also forme surface that forms the side of case cutout parts 211 to 213 These cutout parts 214al and 214bl are provided in order to preven desorption of protector 300 in the state in which protector 300 is at 200, and protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 300, which wi below, are fitted into these parts (see Figure 9)
Further, case fitting groove 214b2, which is used as a fitting part i protector fitting part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) described b on case projecting part 214b This case fitting groove 214b2 is fo portion of vertical wall part 21Oe from the edge of case projecting par the protector 300 side)
Moreover, rod member 215a which protrudes in the direction member 220 (Z direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Od on part 120 side (right front side of Figure 8) and determines the p reservoir element 100 sealed inside case 200, and rod members 2 orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Z direction in Figure 8) edge portions of the four sides of this plate shaped part Regardin parts 220b to 22Oe, the vertical wall that forms the protector 300 side member 220 is 220b, the vertical wall that is placed opposite this ve 220b is 220c and the vertical walls that are respectively connected t parts 220c and 220b are vertical wall parts 22Od and 22Oe (the right s is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical wall
Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure th symmetrical to first case member 210 As with first case member 2 cutout parts 221 to 223 are formed on vertical wall part 220b, and 221a connected to case cutout part 221 and contact groove 222a con cutout part 222 are also formed Case cutout parts 221 and 222 are f same shapes as case cutout parts 211 and 212 of first case membe semicircular shapes), and case cutout part 223 is formed into the case cutout part 213 of first case member 210 (roughly rectangular sh case projecting parts 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of cas
221 to 223, and case projecting part 224a has sloping surface 224a2 the direction of case cutout parts 221 to 223 towards the edge from t connects to the outside surface of vertical wall part 21Od of second ca Case projecting cutout part 224a 1 (not illustrated in the figure) is f projecting part 224a, and case projecting cutout part 224b 1 and case 224b2 are formed on case projecting part 224b across a portion of ver 22Oe from the edge of case projecting part 224b On second case mem hole parts 225a to 225c (not illustrated in the figure) having holes i members 215a 215c fit after passing through in the direction of firs 210 (Z direction) corresponding to the positions at which rod member of first case member 210 are formed sides in Figure 8, both sides in the Z direction) by case cutout holes 2 the side wall of detection part 140 Further, a protrusion ("first proj "other projecting part") that contributes to the prevention of ink co refill unit 13, the prevention of the installation of the cartridge into r the wrong position, and the prevention of the damage of ink suppl ambient air intake part 130 is formed by case projecting part projecting part 224a, and a protrusion ("second projecting part", or " part') that contributes to the prevention of the aforementioned inst wrong position together with the protrusion that is formed from case 214a and case projecting part 224a and the prevention of the damag as ink supply part 120 is formed by case projecting part 214b and part 224b These protrusions will be described in detail below Moreo from Figure 8, ink supply part 120 is positioned closer to the protrusio case projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a than the pro by case projecting part 214b and case projecting part 224b A thr which projecting part 330al of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is loos formed by case projecting cutout parts 214al and 224al, and a thr which projecting part 330bl of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is loos formed by case projecting cutout parts 214bl and 224b 1, while a fit the shape of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped into which first p part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is fitted is formed by case 214b2 and 224b2
As is clear from the above explanations, first case member 210 a member 220 do not only have the same overall external appearance formed such that details such as case projecting parts 214a 214b, 2 and case cutout parts 211 to 213 and 221 to 223 also have the Therefore, when first case member 210 and second case me members 210 and 220 First and second case members 210 and 220 these step portions, and ink reservoir element 110 is fastened Regarding these step portions, the step portions on the side of ink s (right front side of Figure 8) are first case welded parts 216 and 22 portions on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left back side i second case welded parts 217 and 227
In the following explanation, longitudinal direction B of first a members 210 and 220 (direction parallel to the X direction) longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction o element 100, and the longitudinal direction of case 200
Here first and second case welded parts 226 and 227 of second c described First case welded part 226 is connected to case projectin the same plane, and on the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, part 226a, which is formed into a concave shape in the direction o second case member 220, and engagement part 226b that engage member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when ink cartridge 14 is remo unit 13 (see Figure l) Concave part 226a is a region for securing range when pullout member 65 rotates Case welded part 227 has la which is formed into a concave shape in roughly intermediat longitudinal direction B of second case member 220, and this latch part that engages with swing arm mechanism 44b (see Figure 2) i which it is installed in refill unit 13
Although a detailed description will be omitted here, concave illustrated in the figure), engagement part 216b (not illustrated in t latch part 217a (not illustrated in the figure) which are formed wi same shapes as concave part 226a, engagement part 226b, and latc second case member 220, are also formed on first case member 210 in a location corresponding to the side of ambient air intake part 130 in Figure 8) on the bottom surface This is because valve open operating ambient air valve 720 (see Figure 33) projects outward fro intake part 130, and protector through hole 310 is formed in order valve open part 721a
As illustrated in the top view of Figure 9(a), first protector fit which is fitted into the fitting groove formed by case fitting groo 224b2 (see Figure 8) is formed in the vicinity of the end of the si through hole 310 of protector 300 (left side in Figure 9(a)) Second p part 330a which is fitted into the through hole formed by case pr parts 214al and 224a 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protector 300 t formed in the vicinity of the end of the opposite side as the side protector fitting part 320 is formed (right side in Figure 9(a)), and se fitting part 330b, which is fitted into the through hole formed by c cutout holes 214bl and 224b 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protector 300 provided between first protector fitting part 320 and protector throug
Moreover, protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b, whi inserted into the through holes formed by case Gutout parts 213 an side wall of detection part 140 (see Figure 8), are formed in roughl positions in longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (Y direction in Fi Protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b are connected to b formed parallel to longitudinal direction C (top and bottom side walls and they are formed such that they project upward (X direction on t the page in Figure 9(a) and on the side of ink reservoir element 10 Multiple ribs are formed from the bottom surface of protector 300, maintain the strength of protector 300
First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends wall of protector 300 from a roughly intermediate position in direction of first protector fitting part 320 (upward in Figure 9(b)> X they have steps
As a result, when fitted into the fitting groove formed by case 214b2 and 224b2 (see Figure 8) protector vertical wall 321 and the t vertical wall 322 are inserted into the fitting groove When first p part 320 is inserted into the fitting groove, it is inserted as it is res ends of protector vertical wall 321, which extends in the Z direction longitudinal direction C (Y direction), and the end of protector verti longitudinal direction C Here if first protector fitting part 320 i roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by case fitting and 224b2 (see Figure 8), the attachment of protector 300 takes time if protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the the position of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot b However, because it is inserted as it is restricted by protector vertical 322 at one surface (flat surface of protector vertical wall 321) and fo of both sides of protector vertical wall 321 and two ends of protecto 322) the installation properties of protector 300 are improved, installation can be prevented
As illustrated in Figure 9(b), protruding parts 330al and 330bl, away from one another are formed on the edges of second protecto 330a and 330b in the direction in which second protector fitting p 330b mutually separate (edges on the top side of Figure 9(b)), and sh and 330b2, which are formed into roughly cylindrical shapes, are direction of the bottom surface of protector 300 from these edges Figure 9(b)) Shaft parts 330a2 and 330b2 have elasticity because p formed from a resin material, and protector 300 is attached and rem constitutes case 1200, is identical to second case member 220 for co first case member 1210, which constitutes case 1200, is formed s thicker (the length in the Z direction is large) than first case member ink Ink reservoir element 100 has sufficient capacity to store bla configured with the same shape as colored ink reservoir element 10 same parts Moreover, protector 1300 is formed corresponding to case formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z direction) 300 Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with regar member 1210, and descriptions of second case member 220, ink res 100, and protector 1300 will be omitted here Only the depth of firs 1210 (the thickness of vertical directions (length of Z direction) in differs from that of first case member 210, and the rest of its confi same so it detailed description will be omitted here
As illustrated in Figure 11, first case member 1210 comprises part that forms largest surface 1210a and vertical wall parts 1210b are provided in roughly orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Figure 11) from the outer edge portions of the four sides of this plat Regarding vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe, the vertical wall t protector 1300 side of first case member 1210 is 1210b, the vertic placed opposite this vertical wall part 1210b is 1210c, and the vertical respectively connected to vertical wall parts 1210c and 1210b are vert 121Od and 121Oe (the right side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121 side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121Od) Black ink cartridge 14 that the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe are the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of first cas for colored ink, and the thickness of ink cartridge 14 is accordingly in
As with first case member 210, case cutout parts 1211 and 12 Further, rib 1218 is formed an roughly the entire inside surfa member 1210 (roughly the entire largest surface 1210a) This rib 1 the Z direction towards the side of ink reservoir element 100 to the external profile of first case member 1210 is enlarged with respec member 210 (difference in heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 21 member 210 and vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe of first case Because this rib 1218 is provided, the space (gap) formed betwee element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled It is therefore possible t strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
Moreover, by making the external profile of black ink cartridge that of colored ink cartridge 14, it is possible to differentiate bet cartridge 14 and other ink cartridges 14 Black is a darker color than it is not preferable for it to be mistakenly loaded into refill unit However, because the external profile of black ink cartridge 14 is ma be differentiated from other ink cartridges 14, so mistaken instal reduced Further accommodating chamber 50 inside refill unit according to the size of each ink cartridge 14, so black ink cartrid installed into accommodating chamber 50 corresponding to a colore 14
In black ink cartridge 14, the thicknesses of first case member 12 case member 220 m the vertical direction (Z direction) differ, so ink s ambient air supply part 130, and detection part 140 are positione shifted from the center position in the vertical direction (biased positi
Next, large capacity black ink cartridge 14 will be described wit Figures 12 and 13 Figure 12 is an oblique view that shows the exter of large capacity black ink cartridge 14 Figure 13 is an exploded o large capacity black ink cartridge 14 case member 1210 for black ink is simply removed Further ink res 2100 is simply thickened such that the capacity increases with res and black ink reservoir element 100 Therefore, detailed d large capacity black ink cartridge 14 will be omitted here For numerals attached to large capacity black ink cartridge 14, the refe 2000 is added to the reference numerals attached to colored ink car thicknesses of first case member 2210 and second case member 2220 direction (Z direction) are roughly equivalent, so ink supply part 212 supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 are positioned in the cen the vertical direction
Corresponding to ink cartridges with the three types of sizes desc is desirable for refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 to be configured equipped with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that ho cartridges 14 and a single accommodating chamber 50 that selectivel ink cartridge 14 and large capacity black ink cartridge 14 (the inne accommodating chamber 50 has a sized corresponding to large cap cartridge 14) This is because the frequency of text printing using on generally higher than that of color printing However, a type of multif 1 in which refill unit 13 is configured such that it is equipped accommodating chambers 50 that house colored ink cartridges 14 accommodating chamber 50 that houses black ink cartridge 14 may users that infrequently use text printing This will be described once
Next, ink reservoir element 100 will be described with reference Figure 14 is a diagram that shows ink reservoir element 100, and Fi front view of ink reservoir element 100, while Figure 14(b) is a ba reservoir element 100 The state of ink reservoir element 100 illustr 14 is the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunctio As described above, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equip part 110, ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, detectio dispensing part 150, and film 160 Moreover, ink reservoir el configured roughly as a flat hexahedron The pair of surfaces that largest area of this hexahedron is the front surface side and the back ink reservoir element 100 illustrated in Figure 14, and it is co approximately six surfaces with the side surfaces (side walls) posi directions that connect this front surface side and the back surface si surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 the pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when loaded Moreover, film 160 is welded to both the front surface side and the ba of frame part 110 so the thickness of ink reservoir element 100 Z direction) which is formed into a flat shape, can be reduced in co case in which both sides are blocked by plate materials
First, frame part 110 will be described in detail Frame manufactured by injection molding using a resin material and it ha because it is formed to be translucent (or transparent) This is becaus below, light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a of remainin sensor 57 positioned on both sides of detection part 140 is trans receiving part 57b in order to detect the amount of remaining ink i element 100
As illustrated in Figure 14(a) outer circumference welded par welds film 160 to the vicinity of the outer edge part and circumference welded parts 411a to 417a, which are provided on the outer circumference welded part 400a, are formed on the front surfac part 110 Outer circumference welded part 400a is a vertical wall th the inner space of frame part 100 (space on the side of first chamb circumference welded parts 411a to 417b, which are provided on th outer circumference welded part 400b, are formed on the back surfac part 110 Outer circumference welded part 400b is a wall demarcati space of frame 100 Outer circumference welded part 400b is a ver demarcates the inner space of frame part 100 (space on the side of s 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111) Moreover, the blackened edge po circumference welded parts (ribs or second ribs) illustrated in Fi welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or second rib fixed parts) 411b t back surface side edge (blackened portion) of the outer circumferen 400b is the welded surface part (fixed part) on the periphery of the 160 is welded to this welded part by ultrasonic welding
The inside of outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b reservoir chamber 111 in which ink is stored The region on the fro illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir cha the region on the back surface side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is se 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111 Moreover, outer circumference we illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first opening 112a of frame part 1 circumference welded part 400b illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second o frame part 110
Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 4 14(a) and 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 an stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside ambient air c passage forming part 430 (see Figure 14(a)), which communicates wi intake part 130 and introduces ambient air into ink reservoir plate shaped link forming part 440 (see Figures 14(a) and 14(b)), whi roughly the center of frame part 110 (or ink reservoir chamber 111) an vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 to the vicinity of ink dispensin these virtual planes This link forming part 440 will be described in process Ambient air passage forming part 430 is formed such that only on the front surface side of frame part 110 (side of first cham reservoir chamber 111), and it is roughly partitioned by plate pa extends parallel to these planes between a portion of outer circum part 400a and inner circumference welded part 412a and virtual pl This ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 will b detail in a later process In this embodiment, ink reservoir cham frame part 110 (inner space) is provided as the region containin forming part 420, ambient air communicating passage forming forming part 440, and dispensing passage forming part 450 bu communicating passage forming part 430 is an ambient air passage ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111, so it may alternatively b region other than ink reservoir chamber 111 of frame part 110 (inn means that the space from ink reservoir chamber 111 (inner space) d excluding ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 considered the space m which ink is stored
Moreover, on the outer edge of frame part 110 thin plate shap parts are formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Fi bottom part of Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top 14(a) and top part of Figure 14(b)), and through holes 460a to 460c, members 215a to 215c (see Figure 8) of first case member 210 descr inserted are formed on these protruding parts
First, inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a will be reference to Figure 14(a) Inner circumference welded parts 411a to inner circumference welded part 411a, which is provided on supply part 420, inner circumference welded part 412a which is provided o left/right direction in Figure 14(a)) Inner circumference welded part side wall (vertical wall) of ambient air connection passage 433 described below in ambient air communicating passage forming p consists of a downward sloping vertical wall that slopes in a intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (X di circumference welded part 413a is provided in the vicinity of ambi part 130, and it consists of a downward sloping vertical wall th direction that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame p vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall in a direction t orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (vertical dire 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are roughly T- circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward fa shape, and it consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitudina frame part 110, a vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame p downward sloping vertical wall that slopes from this vertical wall in intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 Inner welded part 415a consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitu B of frame part 110, a vertical wall that curves roughly perpendicula faces the direction of the bottom part of frame part 110 from this verti vertical wall that slopes downward from this vertical wall in a intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (Y dir circumference welded part 416a is provided in the vicinity of ink d 150, and it consists of a downward sloping vertical wall that slopes that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 Inner welded part 417a is provided m the vicinity of ink dispensing pa consists of a vertical wall that extends in a direction that is roughly free end As a result, even when multiple inner circumference welde 417a are provided on the inside of outer circumference welded part 4 suppress the slackening of film 160 when film 160 is to be welded to f these multiple inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a do n inhibit the flow of ink facing ink supply part 120 Moreover, inner welded parts 411a to 417a are spread around the inside of outer welded part 400a (scattered in multiple units), so they efficientl generation of slack in film 160 and avoid inhibiting the flow of ink
As illustrated in Figure 14(b), regarding inner circumference wel to 417b inner circumference welded part 411b and inner circumf parts 413b to 417b are formed with roughly the same shapes as inner welded part 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to above and in positions corresponding to those of inner circumferen 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 417a, a circumference welded part 412b is formed with a different shape an position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a Moreo surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are po same virtual plane as that of the welded surface part of outer circum part 400b, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual pla
Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumf part 412bl, which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer welded part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitu B of frame part 110 (Y direction), and inner circumference welded par likewise consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumf part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal frame part 110] Inner circumference welded part 412b 1 and inner welded part 412b2 are provided from plate part 438, which demarcat multiple units) so they efficiently reduce the inhibition of i suppressing the generation of slack in film 160
Because inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 41 equipped in a spread out orientation (scattered in multiple units), which case 200 is formed from a flexible resin material, it is possible deformation with inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a an even if the case deforms on the side of ink reservoir element 100 A possible to prevent the damage of the case and the damage of film outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b and inner circumf parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b are formed with vertical provided on the front surface side or the back surface side, so extr dies are not required when frame part 110 is to be injection molded possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of ink cartridge 14
Next, supply path forming part 420 will be described with referenc Figure 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420 Fi diagram that shows the outline of supply path forming part 420 (d back surface side of frame part 110) Figure 15(b) is a diagram cross sectional view of supply path forming part 420 through lin Figure 15(a), Figure 15(c) is a diagram that shows the state in which remaining ink has decreased, and Figure 15(d) is a diagram that sho which the supply of ink has been completed
As illustrated in Figure 15(a) supply path forming part 42 equipped with first supply communicating hole 421, which communi supply part 120, supply partition wall 422, which is formed i triangular frame when viewed from the direction perpendicular t Figure 15(a) such that it encloses this first supply communicating part 427, which covers the region on the inside of supply partition sandwiching part 425, which is provided on the free end of plate pa sensor arm 470 ("displacement member", see Figure 19) that is rotating member (described below), and inner circumference wel which is provided in the direction of detection part 140 (see Figure 1 arm sandwiching part 425 Moreover, film 160 is welded to supply 422, and its welded surface part is positioned on the same virtua welded surface part of outer circumference welded part 400b (virtua space enclosed by supply partition wall 422 and plate part 427 chamber 426, which temporarily stores the ink that is supplied to i 120, and the space formed by supply concave part 424 and plate part part space 424a As illustrated in Figure 14(b), this concave part spac than part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir cham space) in the height direction (Y direction) of cartridge 14, and it c portion of space that is positioned on the bottommost side (lowe reservoir chamber 111 As illustrated in Figure 15(a), first supply c hole 421 is formed above bottom part 400bl (same height as the top e space 424a), and second supply communicating hole 423 is formed part 400bl In other words, second supply communicating hole 423 i the lower side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (bottom part side) that first supply communicating hole 421 Arm sandwiching part 425 i roughly leftward facing C shape when viewed from the direction pe the page in Figure 15(a) and a portion of the side opposite ink suppl side in Figure 15(a)) is opened As illustrated in Figures 14(a) and part 411b and welded part 411a described above are provided such the opposite sides as one another from plate part 428
As illustrated in Figure 15(b), supply partition wall 422 is for when film 160 is to be welded, it separates the inside of frame ink supply part 120, will be described with reference to Figures 15(c illustrated in Figure 15(c), when liquid surface I of ink that is store 110 is higher than supply concave part 424, the ink is supplied to i 120 through the ink flow path indicated by arrow D in Figure 15(c recessed space 424a is filled with ink, so the inside of ink supply ch is enclosed by supply partition wall 422 is also filled with ink In othe state illustrated in Figure 15(c), ink fills the inside of ink supply c even if liquid surface I of the ink drops below first supply communic the ink can be supplied to ink supply part 120 through communicating hole 423 In this embodiment, ink supply part cylindrically shaped as illustrated in Figure 8, and, as described bel ink supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670 are housed insi element 116, while shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) i first supply communicating hole 421 Therefore, taking into consider occupied by ink supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670, there i formation of first supply communicating hole 421 on the bottom side chamber 111 (frame part 110) In a configuration in which supply par is not provided, when liquid surface I of the ink drops belo communicating hole 421, it becomes impossible to supply the ink an the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 becomes poor However by supply partition wall 422 and forming second supply communicating bottom part side lower than first supply communicating hole 431, i supply ink until liquid surface I of the ink falls below second supply c hole 433, so it is possible to facilitate the full use of the ink
When ink is further supplied from the state illustrated in Figure 1 surface I of the ink drops below the upper end of supply concave becomes lower than second supply communicating hole 423, ambien supplied after liquid surface I of the ink reaches second supply comm 423, so the full use of the ink becomes poor Therefore, supply conc provided, and it is configured such that second communicatin positioned lower than part 400bl that forms the bottom part of chamber 111 by distance tl As a result, as illustrated in Figure 15(d), which the supply of ink has been completed, only a slight amount of the vicinity of the bottom part of supply concave part 424 (part below communicating hole 423), and the amount of ink that cannot be s markedly reduced Moreover supply concave part 424 is formed on t part of ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14) so the ink i chamber 111 flows into supply concave part 424 and accumulates in part 424 when the amount of ink becomes small Therefore, by estab concave part 424, it is possible to facilitate the full use of the ink insid chamber 111
Debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave is because the difference of distance t2 is provided between communicating hole 423 and the bottom part side wall of supply co
(side wall on the lower side in Figure 15(d)) As described above, when
<
I of the ink drops below second supply communicating hole 423 cannot be supplied, so the ink that is between second supply comm 423 and supply concave part 424 remains inside supply concave pa being supplied to ink supply part 120 Dust or plastic debris that is l frame part 110 when ink cartridge 14 is manufactured sometimes the ink, but the specific gravity of this dust or plastic debris is great the ink, so it remains in the vicinity of the bottom part of frame part as illustrated in Figure 15(d), debris E remains inside the ink re supply concave part 424 When debris E is supplied to ink supply shows the outline of ambient air communicating passage forming p 16(b) is a diagram that shows ambient air communicating passage fo from the perspective of arrow XVIb in Figure 16(a), and Figure 16( that shows ambient air communicating passage forming part perspective of arrow XVIc in Figure 16(a)
As illustrated in Figure 16(a), ambient air communicating passag 430 is primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that com ambient air intake part 130, second ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that com ink reservoir chamber 111, and ambient air connection passag communicates with first ambient air communicating chamber 43 ambient air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first surface film 160 is welded (left front side of Figure 16, first surface 437a is a contained in virtual plane R) The chambers and passage of firs communicating chamber 431 and second ambient air communicatin and ambient air connection passage 433 are formed as film 160 is front side of Figure 16(a)
First ambient air communicating hole 434, which communicates air intake part 130 is formed on the side of second surface 437b tha surface 437a of first ambient air communicating chamber 431 (secon is the surface of plate part 438 described above) In second communicating chamber 432, second ambient air communicating h communicates with first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir chamber 111 the side of first surface 437a, and third ambient air communicating h communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoir chamber 11 second surface 437b (plate part 438) First ambient air communicati which communicate with first ambient air communicating chamber ambient air communicating chamber 432, respectively, are formed first surface 437a, and these communicating openings 433a and 433 areas that are substantially smaller than the side wall areas of fir communicating chamber 431 and second ambient air communicatin (side wall surfaces 431a and 432a on which communicating openings are formed) Because a part having a passage that introduces am extremely small cross sectional area (ambient air connection pa provided (so called labyrinth), the resistance of the flow path whe passes through becomes large As a result, it is possible to reduce the more ink than necessary through ambient air connection passage 433
As is clear from Figure 14(a), ambient air connection passa downward in the direction of second ambient air communicating cha first ambient air communicating chamber 431 Because ambient passage 433 slopes downward the device is in the position in which i is installed in refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1, ink that has p ambient air connection passage 433 can be naturally returned to chamber 111 due to gravity Moreover, because the cross sectional a air connection passage 433 is made small, the penetration of ink sto reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection passage 433 ca Here, when ink penetrates into ambient air connection passage 433, formed and it is sometimes impossible to introduce ambient air result As described above, because ambient air connection passa downward even if ink penetrates into the passage, the ink is re reservoir chamber 111, so the formation of meniscuses can be prevented Further ambient air connection passage 433 is formed as welding of film 160, so at least one of the surfaces is a side wal second ambient air communicating chamber 432 in the position cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) (stat Figure 16(a)) Therefore, even in cases in which an amount of ink is st a meniscus is formed on second ambient air communicating hole 4 ambient air communicating hole 435 is blocked ambient air c introduced into ink reservoir chamber 111 through third communicating hole 436
Next, the mechanism that prevents the leakage of ink fro communicating passage forming part 430 will be described wit Figures 16(b) and 16(c) As described above, case 200 of ink cartridg into a cubic shape containing a pair of largest surfaces that oppose o when this is loaded onto a flat bed, the device may assume one positions in which one of largest surfaces 210a and 220a forms the (bottom surface) At this time, ambient air intake part 130 is positio surface of case 200, but, as described below, it is difficult for ink ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 in either of the
Figures 16(b) and 16(c) show the positions of ambient air c passage forming part 430 corresponding to each of the two loading po 16(b) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such tha connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side (the side of Ilia of frame part 110 is the lower side and first surface 437a is the lo Figure 16(c) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such air connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side (the chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side and second surfa lower side)
As illustrated in Figure 16(b), when ink cartridge 14 is placed suc air connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side during the communicating chamber 431 In the state illustrated in Figure 16(b) I of the ink has not reached the position of the opening of fir communicating hole 434, so even if ink cartridge 14 is placed such t connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side, the effl ambient air intake part 130 to the outside can be prevented
As illustrated in Figure 16(c), when ink cartridge 14 is placed suc air connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side during th cartridge 14, the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flo ambient air communicating chamber 432, but liquid surface I of th reach the opening position of communicating opening 433b o connection passage 433 As a result, the ink does not flow int connection passage 433 from communicating opening 433b, so the in into first ambient air communicating chamber 431 Therefore, even i 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage 433 is positione side, the efflux of ink from ambient air intake part 130 to the prevented
As described above, by configuring first ambient air communic 431, second ambient air communicating chamber 432, and ambient passage 433 as described above and establishing the opening p ambient air communicating hole 434 and the opening position of c opening 433b in positions that are symmetrical to ambient air conn 433 it is possible to prevent the leakage of ink from ambient air in Further, by making the cross sectional area of ambient air conne small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink and to prevent into first ambient air communicating chamber 431
Here link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to F forming part 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake par Link forming part 440 consists of ambient air side linking part provided on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left side in Figur side in Figure 14(b)) using inner circumference welded parts 415 boundaries, and dispensing side linking part 442, which is provided ink dispensing part 150 (right side in Figure 14(a) or left side in Fig ambient air side linking part 441 inner circumference welded par 414a, and 414b are respectively provided on the sides of first and se 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewed in the direction to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back side when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b)> here, perpendicular to the page is parallel to the Z direction) from this a linking part 441 Further, the upper end of the height direction ( ambient air side linking part 441 communicates with inner circumf part 412a of ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 dispensing side connecting part 442, inner circumference welded par 417a, and 417b are respectively provided on the sides of first and se 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewed in the direction to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back side when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b)> here, perpendicular to the page is parallel to the Z direction) from this d linking part 442
First linking communicating hole 443 which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b, is formed on ambient air si 441, and second through fourth linking communicating holes 4 connect first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b are formed on d linking part 442 Here if linking communicating holes 443 446 are linking forming part 440, first chamber Ilia and second chambe accurately)
The part enclosed by ambient air side linking part 441, dispensi part 442, and ambient air communicating passage forming par reservoir chamber internal opening 113, which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b, and the part enclosed by a linking part 441, dispensing side linking part 442, and supply pat 420 is second reservoir internal opening 114, which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b In other words the part t ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111 and the part that supp inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside communicate in the forming part 440 and without the division of first chamber Ili chamber 111b As a result, the introduction of ambient air and the su be performed in a stable space
Linking rib 418a, which connects multiple inner circumference 412a 417a provided on the side of first opening 112a from link formin linking rib 418b, which connects inner circumference welded part provided on the side of second opening 112b from link forming part 4 on link forming part 440 These linking ribs 418a and 418b are not ill figure, but they are formed into thin walled shapes with vertical lower than inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and inner welded parts 412b to 417b Further, most of these linking ribs 418a formed on the edge of link forming part 440 As a result linking ribs connect inner circumference welded parts 412a to 417a and 412b to are formed on the edge of link forming part 440, so they can maintai of link forming part 440 Moreover linking ribs 418a and 418b ar thin walled shapes, and they are formed with vertical walls that a inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and 412b 417b, so it be supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
As illustrated m the figure, dispensing passage forming part 45 equipped with dispensing cylinder part 451, which is formed i cylindrical shape into which ink dispensing plug 520 (see Figure 21), described below, is pressed first dispensing communicating hol communicates between this dispensing cylinder part 451 and the reservoir chamber 111, roughly U shaped dispensing partition wall provided from the outer surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, provided edge forms the forms the welded surface part on which film and partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect t chamber 111, and second dispensing communicating hole 454, wh opening part of dispensing partition wall 453 The opened part cylinder part 451 is opening 451a which is formed on the outside frame part 110, and the surface that opposes this opening 451a is bot of dispensing cylinder part 451 The region demarcated by dispensing 453 and film 160 is dispensing partition wall flow path 453a
Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference which film 160 is welded, and dispensing partition wall flow path 45 dispensing communicating hole 454 are formed in the state in whi welded As with the welded end part of the other inner circumferenc 411b to 417b the welded end part of dispensing partition wall 453 is the same virtual plane as the welded end part of outer circumferenc 400b
A detailed description will be given below, but when ink is disp reservoir chamber 111, ink is dispensed in a state in which seco communicating hole 454 is positioned on top and first dispensing c hole 452 is positioned on bottom (position in which the Y direction is becomes full the volume of ink expands and film 160 is damaged or d boundary where ink cartridge 14 is placed If film 160 is damaged, and if film 160 deforms, the volume inside ink reservoir chambe making it impossible to stably supply ink Therefore, in order to preve and deformation of film 160, ink is not dispensed to the degree that t reservoir chamber 111 becomes full
In this embodiment, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chambe is dispensed is lower than the ambient pressure Therefore, decompression process in which the pressure is reduced by aspirati air mside ink reservoir chamber 111 from dispensing passage formi sometimes performed This is performed in order to reduce the amo air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to maintain the degree of deaer and to reduce the generation of air bubbles inside the ink The deaer is for the purpose of maintaining the viscosity of the ink at a roughly and this is because regarding the generation of air bubbles inside th bubbles are supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) the pre to discharge the ink is not transmitted to the discharge opening (no the figure), so the ink cannot be correctly discharged
In the case in which a subsequent decompression process is perfor ambient air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is aspirated from dispe forming part 450, the resulting amount of ink is not correct, regardl or not an appropriate amount of ink was dispensed If the amount of this causes losses to the user of ink cartridge 14, which is not prefera when first dispensing communicating hole 452 is enclosed by rou dispensing partition wall 453 and second dispensing communicati placed above (upper side in Figure 17(a)) liquid surface I of the dispensing communicating hole 452), there is an amount of distance XVIIIb XVIIIb in Figure 18(a), and Figure 18(c) is a cross sectional vicinity of detection part 140 through line XVIIIc XVIIIc in Figure 18
As illustrated in Figure 18(a) detection part 140 projects outwa part 110 (right side in Figure 18(a)) Detection part 140 is equipped part 141, which encloses the end of sensor arm 470 (see Figure 19) part 473c) by sandwiching it with a pair of wall surfaces and for through which sensor arm 470 can be displaced Enclosure part 141 i roughly box shaped passage by a bottom surface, which is formed b 141a inside enclosure part 141 (lower side in Figure 18(a)), a pair of which are formed by both side walls 141b that are provided on b bottom wall 141a, an inner side surface, which is formed by inner that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side wal ceiling surface, which is formed ceiling wall 14 Id that connects to t both side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c an opposite bottom wall 141a Detection part 140 is also equipped with a part 142 which is provided such that it projects upward from the formed by bottom wall 141a and supports sensor arm 470 from belo wall 143, which is provided from the mside wall of frame pa circumference welded part 400b) such that it connects to arm suppo and extends in the direction of supply path forming part 420 is p vicinity of detection part 140 As is clear from Figure 18(b), arm suppo is formed in the center of the width direction of the passage inside 140, and it is arranged such that the end of sensor arm 470 (shiel 473c) is also positioned in the center of the passage inside detection details will be described below, but sensor arm 470 rotates according of ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 and it is a member that is that ink cartridge 14 has been installed in accommodating chamber 5 accordance with the amount of ink inside ink reservoir chamber space), sensor arm 470 can change the amount of light received by part 57b and detect the presence or absence of remaining ink In Fi positions of light emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57b of detection sensor 57 when ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accommod 50 of multifunction device 1 are illustrated, but, as illustrated in t emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57b are positioned in detection part 140
As illustrated in Figure 18(b), the thickness of arm supportin formed such that second gap t4 between the inside walls of enclosure of wall surfaces, inside surfaces of both side walls 141b) and the outsi supporting part 142 is narrower than first gap t3 between the i enclosure 141 (pair of wall surfaces* inside surfaces of both side walls outside of sensor arm 470 Here, the ink stored inside detection part and when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step with this reduct liquid surface I of the ink falls below detection part 140, the ink m part 140 is depleted but because first gap t3 between sensor arm 470 141 is minute ink remains inside detection part 140 due to the sur the ink and sensor arm 470 sometimes does not rotate normally due tension of the ink Incidentally, the reason that first gap t3 is provide spacing is that, when this spacing is made wide, the spacing between part 57a and light receiving part 57b also widens, and the detectio remaining ink detection sensor 57 thus deteriorates Therefore, by supporting part 142 s,uch that first gap t3 > second gap t4 it is ensur surface tension that is generated between arm supporting part 142 part 141 is greater than the ink surface tension that is generated b arm 470 and enclosure part 141 As a result, the ink that remains in enclosure 141 also slopes downward Therefore, ink that is d enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 flows downward in t ink reservoir chamber 111 (or supply path forming part 420) Further, in the cross sectional view in Figure 18(b), the junction part (edge) 141a of enclosure 141 and arm supporting part 142 is formed an cross sectional perspective (roughly a right angle), so the capillar junction part of enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 b and this forms a shape that is conducive to guiding ink to the side o chamber 111 (or supply path forming part 420) In other words, the j enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 forms a fluid guidin for guiding the ink As a result, it is possible to efficiently make the inside enclosure part 141 flow downward
As illustrated in Figure 18(a), vertical wall 143 that connects to a part 141 is formed on sloping surface 143a, which slopes downward i of supply path forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Slopin constitutes a portion of the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer welded part 400b) Further, as illustrated in the cross sectional view i the junction part of vertical wall 143 and the inside wall of frame part angularly from a cross sectional perspective (roughly a right angle), a such that its thickness is roughly equivalent to that of arm suppor Therefore, vertical wall 143 slopes downward in the direction o forming part 420, and the junction part with the inside wall of fra formed into a roughly right angle, so ink can be efficiently guided in t supply path forming part 420 by this slope and the capillary force I the junction part of vertical wall 143 and the inside wall of frame pa fluid guiding path (guide) for guiding the ink Because the thick supporting part 142 and vertical wall 143 are formed such that the accurately detect the amount of remaining ink
Here, sensor arm 470 will be described with reference to Figure 1 a diagram that shows sensor arm 470 Figure 19(a) is a diagram t front side of sensor arm 470, and Figure 19(b) is a diagram that sho 470 from the perspective of arrow XiXb in Figure 19(a) Sensor arm 4 for detecting the amount of remaining ink inside ink reservoir cham arm 470 is manufactured by injection molding using a resin material for example), and it has light blocking properties because it is formed
Sensor arm 470 is a rotating member that rotates according to remaining ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and a portion i remaining ink detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5), which detects remaining ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 Sensor arm 4 equipped with balance part 471, which is formed from a material specific gravity than that of the ink attachment part 472, which frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 473 which ext attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to ba (upward in Figure 19(a)) further extends sloping upward, and block possible detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57 Attachmen linking part that connects balance part 471 and arm part 473
Roughly cylindrical attachment shaft 472a, which is atta sandwiching part 425 (see Figure 14) of frame part 110, is formed part 472 This attachment shaft 472a is formed with a diameter that i the inside diameter of arm sandwiching part 425 and is larger than th opening of arm sandwiching part 425 As a result, when sensor arm it can be operated with little resistance and the deviation of sensor arm sandwiching part 425 can be prevented
Arm part 473 consists of vertical arm part 473a which extends resistance when sensor arm 470 rotates increases, which someti impossible to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Furthe above, when the thickness of detection part 140 increases, the range remaining ink detection sensor 57 widens accordingly and the detect deteriorates, so an expensive, high performance remaining ink de with favorable detection properties becomes necessary Therefore, a formed with a thin profile in order to prevent increases in the scale o 14 and to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Ribs 473d vertical arm part 473a and sloping arm part 473b, and the strength by these ribs
Roughly semispherical arm protruding parts 473el and 473e2 shielding arm part 473c in two locations on the top and bottom of t inside detection part 140 (upper side end and lower side end in Fig these arm protruding parts 473el and 473e2 reduce the likelihood of part 473c adhering to the inside wall of detection part 140 due to the s of the ink and becoming unable to rotate In other words, because a parts 473el and 473e2 are formed into semispherical shapes, the makes contact with the inside wall of detection part 140 is th protruding parts 473el and 473e2, so the effects of the surface tensio reduced
Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with a specific gravit than that of the ink, so when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step in the amount of remaining ink balance part 471 moves in the di bottom part of frame part 110 (direction of the bottom part of ink rese 111, downward in Figures 14(a) and 14(b)) in step with this drop surface I of the ink When balance part 471 moves in the direction part, and arm part 473 moves in the direction of the top part using at less than that of the ink, so a working process is not required, and it is manufacture complex dies, so the manufacturing cost of sensor arm 470 can be
Next, the positional relationships and shapes of ink supply part 1 intake part 130 and detection part 140 will be described with referen Figure 20 is a diagram that shows a portion of ink reservoir eleme 20(a) is a diagram that shows the side surface of ink reservoir eleme 20(b) is a diagram that shows a partial front view of ink reservoir ele Figure 20(c) is a cross sectional view through line XXc XXc in Figure
As illustrated in Figures 20(a) and 20(b), ink supply part 12 intake part 130, and detection part 140 are provided on one of the s frame part 110 (one end surface, the side surface in the fron installation when ink cartridge 14 is installed) As described abov illustrated in Figures 20(a) and 2θ(b) is the position in which ink installed inside accommodating chamber 50 of refill unit 13 (s Therefore, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed inside ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, and ink supply sequentially aligned from top (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom o In other words, the elements are aligned in the height direction (Y d cartridge 14
As illustrated in Figure 20(a), width t5 of detection part 140 is for it is shorter than diameter tβ of the opening of ink supply part 120 (o supply cap 600 described below (see Figure 34)) Further, as illustr 20(b) detection part 140 is formed such that it is concave in the dire part 110 (in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir cha respect to ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
As described above, arm part 473 of sensor arm 470 is positioned o detection part 140 As will be described below, the light path of cartridge 14 when in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is install 13 - in other words, the surfaces are vertical When ink adhere surfaces of these detection surfaces 140a and 140b, it is sometimes detect the accurate amount of remaining ink
For example, at the time of the transportation of multifunction de necessarily transported such that multifunction device 1 is horizon ink supply part 120 is sometimes positioned on top, but ink someti from ink supply part 120 at this time and adheres to detection pat when ink cartridge 144 is temporarily removed from refill unit 13 in to needle 49 of multifunction device 1 is likely to adhere to the opening of ink supply part 120, but after it is removed, the ink that vicinity of the opening of ink supply part 120 sometimes adheres to 140 depending on the position in which the user handles ink cartridg cartridge 14 is once again installed in refill unit 13 m the state in adhered to detection part 140, because ink detection part 140 (dete 140a and 140b) and light receiving part 57b and light emittin remaining ink detection sensor 57 are in close proximity in the inst described above, there is a risk that the ink that has adhered to dete will transfer to light receiving part 57b and light emitting part 57a of detection sensor 57 In this way, ink that adheres to remaining ink d 57 blocks light and therefore deteriorates the sensitivity of remainin sensor 57 This deterioration of sensitivity is even more promi cartridges that use pigmented ink
In this embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 20(b), detection part 1 in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with supply part 120, so it is possible to make it difficult for ink to adhe part 140, even if ink drips from ink supply part 120 In other words, Because detection surfaces 140a and 140b are vertical when in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in reήll unit 13, the ink is most sus effects of gravity when ink cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13 adhered to detection surfaces 140a and 140b, so it drops quickly possible to substantially avoid the transfer of ink to light receiving light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 Furthe that drops does not adhere to the end surface of ink supply part 120
Further, as illustrated in Figure 2θ(c), side walls that form detect and 140b from the side surface of frame part 110 are formed on dete Therefore, edge part 140c where the side surface of frame part 110 surfaces 140a and 140b intersect is formed at a roughly perpendicula ink adheres to the vicinity of edge 140c the capillary force of edge the ink because edge 140c is formed at a roughly perpendicular angle, likely to flow to the side of ink supply part 120 through edge 140c possible to reduce the adherence of ink to detection surfaces 140a and
Next the configuration of the parts of ink reservoir elemen described with reference to Figure 21 Figure 21 is an exploded fro reservoir element 100
As illustrated in Figure 21 ink reservoir element 100 is primaril into four elements The four parts are frame part 110 ink supply m which constitutes ink supply part 120, ambient air intake mechani constitutes ambient air intake part 130, and ink dispensing plug pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing part 150 ( Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of an elastic member such as Pul once it is pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451 it cannot be easily even if the needle is removed or inserted, it is configured such that t needle is blocked ink supply element 115 (arranged on the front and back sides perpendicular to the page in Figure 21) Likewise, protruding parts (protruding part 117b is not illustrated in the figure) which pr direction of the outer circumference of ambient air intake element fasten ambient intake mechanism 510, are symmetrically arranged intake element 117 centered on the axial center of ambient air intak (arranged on the front and back sides in directions perpendicular Figure 21) Protruding parts 116a 116b, 117a and 117b are formed end surface on the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 protrudes in a di perpendicular to the outer circumferential surface of ink supply elem outer circumferential surface of ambient air intake element 117 (Z they slope from this protruding edge part towards the outer circumfe of ink supply element 116 or the outer circumference part of ambi element 117 In other words when ink supply mechanism 500 an intake mechanism 510 are attached to ink supply element 116 an intake element 117, the easy desorption of ink supply mechanism 50 air intake mechanism 510 can be prevented
Next, the components of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambi mechanism 510 will be described with reference to Figures 22 throug is an exploded view of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambie mechanism 510 Figure 22(a) is an exploded view of ink supply mecha Figure 22(b) is an exploded view of ambient air intake mechanism 51
As illustrated in Figure 22(a), ink supply mechanism 500 is supply cap 600, which is installed on ink supply element 116, sup which is made of an elastic resin material such as rubber into which Figure 2) of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) is inserted, sup which blocks the flow path of ink when this supply joint 610 and th formed with the same material and into the same shape as those spring 630, valve seat 660, which makes contact with this second su and receives check valve 670, and cover 680 which covers check valv the valve and this valve seat 660 Supply valve 620, first supply spri slider 640 and second supply spring 650 constitute supply valve that actually operates
As illustrated in Figure 22(b) ambient air intake mechanism 5 with ambient air cap 700, which is installed on ambient air intak ambient air joint 710, which is made of an elastic resin material s ambient air valve 720, which blocks the flow path of ink when this a 710 and the bottom wall make contact and makes contact with b multifunction device 1 (see Figure 5) and opens the flow path (passa air when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (refi Figure l), first ambient air spring 730, which is housed inside this am 720 and is made of a resinous elastic material, ambient air slider 740 the open surface of ambient air valve 720 and can be operated direction, which is the movement direction of ambient air valve 720 (direction of arrow 02 in Figure 22(b), hereafter called the "axial d ambient air supply mechanism 510", as is clear from Figure 14, ambi 510 becomes parallel to the X direction when ink cartridge 14 is loade ambient air spring 750, which is housed inside this ambient air sli formed with the same material and into the same shape as those of fir spring 730 Ambient air valve 720, first ambient air spring 730, amb 740, and second ambient air spring 750 constitute ambient air valve that actually operates
Below, supply cap 600, supply joint 610, supply valve 620, fir supply springs 630 and 650, supply slider 640 valve seat 660, ch cross sectional view of supply cap 600 through line XXIIIe XXIIIe in
As illustrated in Figure 23(a), supply cap 600 is formed with a t from a side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicu in Figure 23(a)), and the upper side part in Figure 23(a) is supply sec which is fastened to the outer circumferential surface of ink supply el is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape, while the lower side part i is ink storage part 602, which has an ink storage space for preve dripping to the outside of ink cartridge 14
Engagement holes 603a and 603b (see Figure 23(b) for engagem which are formed from the linking part of ink storage part 602 to t vicinity of the top (vicinity of the upper side end in Figure 23(a)) an protruding parts 116a and 116b (see Figure 21) of ink supply elem supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21) supply securing part 601 ,
As illustrated in Figure 23(b), a pair of supply cap cutout parts (see Figure 23(c) for supply cap cutout part 604b), which are forme line that is roughly orthogonal to the straight line that connects eng 603a and 603b (positions moved approximately 90° with respect to a of ink supply mechanism 500) and are cut out facing the direction part 602 from the top surface of supply securing part 601 (upper Figure 23(b)) are formed on supply securing part 601
As illustrated in the front view in Figure 23(c) and in the bottom 23(d), insertion hole 605, into which needle 49 (see Figure 2) is inser below), is formed in roughly the center position of ink storage part 60
600 As illustrated in Figure 23(c), the region from the circle that f hole 605 to the circle one step outward is first upper wall 606a, w upper end surface of ink storage part 602, and the region from the circ lower wall 606c and second upper wall 606d is outer circumferen which forms the outer circumferential surface of ink storage part 60 606b forms the cylindrical part inside ink storage part 60 circumferential wall 606e, which is connected to this sloping wall 606 606c, forms the cylindrical part of the outside that encloses slop (cylindrical part of the inside)
In Figure 23(d), sloping wall 606b slopes downward so the insert needle 49 is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross se Figure 23(e) such that it decreases in diameter towards insertion h maximum diameter of that of opening 600a, which forms the final exi a result, the inner circumferential surface on the side of axial center wall 606b becomes the insertion path into which needle 49 (see Figure The space of range t7 illustrated in Figures 23(c) and 23(c) (in ot space formed by sloping wall 606b, lower wall 606c and outer circu 606e) forms ink storing part 607, in which ink can be stored (accumul
When supply cap 600 is attached to ink supply element 116 (s protruding parts 116a and 116b of ink supply element 116 protrud circumferential direction, so supply cap 600 is attached as it increas in the outer circumferential direction Because supply cap cutout p 604b are formed, the diameter of supply cap 600 increases in the dire engagement parts 603a and 603b move away from one another Th supply cap 600 is to be attached, it can be attached without ap pressure, so it is possible to improve the installation efficiency damage to supply cap 600
Figure 24 is a diagram that shows supply joint 610 Figure 24(a that shows a side view of supply joint 610, Figure 24(b) is a diagra plan view of supply joint 610, Figure 24(c) is a diagram that shows a outer circumference part of supply joint 610 This joint outer circumfe is the part that is sandwiched between second upper wall 606d of s and the outside end surface of ink supply element 116 when in the supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116 The part illustr step of joint outer circumference part 611 is joint inner circumfer which is pressed into and arranged inside ink supply element 116 ( and forms the inner circumference part of supply joint 610, and the u joint inner circumference part 612 is illustrated in Figure 24(a) Fu illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 612 is joi 613, which makes contact with supply valve 620 (see Figure 25) Sup made of an elastic material such as a resin rubber
As illustrated in Figure 24(b), the axial center of supply joint 61 on axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, and joint contact inner circumference part 612 and joint outer circumference part ar formed towards the outer circumferential direction from this axial ce
As illustrated m Figure 24(d), joint contact part 613 projects fro 612a of joint inner circumference part 612 (surface on the side that with supply valve 620) Joint contact part 613 is formed such that it n tip 613a (upper end part in Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes co bottom surface of supply valve 620 and blocks the flow path of the ink protruding part 614, which protrudes from the inner circumferential axial center Ol opening 612c, which forms the insertion opening of Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 612b of joint inner circumfer (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped insertion passage 612d, w between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614 are formed circumference part 612 As illustrated in Figure 24(c), the portio passage 612d that is formed in a stepped shape is formed with roug bottom surface 612b, step part flow path 615a, which is demarcat insertion passage 612d connected to opening 612c, protruding part fl which is demarcated by inner circumferential surface 614a of joint p 614 connected to insertion passage 612d, and contact part flow path demarcated by stepped surface 614b connected to inner circumfer 614a of joint protruding part 614 and inner circumferential surfac contact part 613 connected to this stepped surface 614b
The lower half of step part flow path 615a is formed in a steppe direction of axial center 01, and the upper half of step part flow path in a tapered shape towards protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, path 615a is formed in a stepped shape such that the diameter grad from opening 612c towards the contact surface with inner circumfe 614a of joint protruding part 614 The lower part of step part flo formed in a stepped shape so even if needle 49 (see Figure 2) is r minute quantity of ink flows through ink flow path 615, the ink capillary force due to the angular part of this step part so it is poss ink from dripping to the outside of supply joint 610 When needle 49 i dripping of ink can be likewise prevented, even if ink drips into ink from the tip of needle 49 In this embodiment supply cap 600 is equ storage part 602, so the portion of the lower half of step part flow pat formed in a stepped shape may alternatively be formed in a tapered s
Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smalle ink flow path 615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindric inside diameter of this protruding part flow path 615b is formed s slightly smaller than the diameter of needle 49 (see Figure 2) Con path 615c is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape hav diameter that is larger than that of protruding part flow path 615b, Needle 49 which is inserted from opening 612c, is guided to the u step part flow path 615a that is formed in a tapered shape and i protruding part flow path 615b At this time, because the insid protruding part flow path 615b is slightly smaller than the diamete needle 49 elastically adheres to inner circumferential surface protruding part 614 that forms protruding part flow path 615b and is such that it spreads protruding part flow path 615b In othe protruding part 614 acts to seal the periphery of needle 49 that i protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, if the area of the part of s that elastically adheres to the periphery of needle 49 becomes large, when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Fig large, and smooth installation thus becomes impossible How embodiment, a configuration that establishes joint protruding part 6 contact with needle 49 only on the inner circumferential surface 614 it is possible to reduce the surface of contact with needle 49 and to s the cartridge in multifunction device 1 Moreover, needle 49 is inserte path 615, so the flow path through which ink actually flows become needle 49 Further because contact part flow path 615c is f countersunk shape, the displacement of supply joint 610 in the dir center Ol when needle 49 is inserted can be reduced
Figure 25 is a diagram that shows supply valve 620 Figure 25(a that shows a side view of supply valve 620, Figure 25(b) is a diagra side view of supply valve 620 from the perspective of arrow XXVb i Figure 25(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply valve 620, a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply valve 620, and Fig cross sectional view of supply valve 620 through line XXVe XXVe in F
As illustrated in Figure 25(a), supply valve 620 is equipped wit mechanism 500 Moreover, as illustrated in Figure 25(c), valve proje which projects in the opposite direction as valve bottom wall 621 f valve outer circumferential wall 622 in the direction of axial center 0 valve outer circumferential wall 622, and valve guide grooves 623 are the vicinity of the bottom of valve outer circumferential wall 622 fro valve projecting wall 624 As a result, because the distance of valve 623 is secured as a long distance the deviation of slider loose inse from valve guide grooves 623 can be prevented
Moreover, a pair of valve constraining parts 625, which project direction as valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of suppl connected to valve outer circumferential wall 622 Each of the valv parts 625 is equipped with valve hook part 626, which projects towar Ol from its tip (tip of the upper side portion in Figure 25(a)) and supply slider 640
Further, four valve protruding parts 622a, which protrude i shapes in the outer circumferential direction and are formed from bottom of valve outer circumferential wall 622, are formed o circumferential wall 622 with equal spacing along valve outer circu 622 These valve protruding parts 622a are provided in order to sm the operations of supply valve 620 when supply valve 620 is inserted i element 116 (see Figure 21) When there are no valve protruding p inner circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and circumferential surface 622 sometimes make contact, so the contac ink supply element 116 becomes large and the resistance at the tim also becomes large Therefore, because valve protruding parts 62 semicircular shapes are provided, only valve protruding parts 622a with the inner circumferential surface of ink supply element 116, and bottom wall 621 (direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 25(c)), valve bottom wall 621 in positions corresponding to valve guides constraining part 625 in the direction of axial center Ol of ink supp 500 (direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 25(c)) Valve bo projects upward from its bottom surface and is equipped with valv 628, which is a platform that receives spring top part 632 of first sup (see Figure 26) Valve bearing part 628 is made of two plate sh arranged in parallel on valve bottom wall 621 As illustrated in Fi height of valve bearing part 628 in the direction of axial center Ol i that it is substantially lower than valve outer circumferential w bearing part 628 is provided in order to ensure that first supply sprin make contact with valve bottom wall 621 when first supply spring 6 in the space inside valve outer circumferential wall 622 This is b supply spring 630 makes contact with valve bottom wall 621, the in blocked and ink no longer flows Therefore, valve bearing part 628 order to secure the ink flow path, and the part is acceptable as long spring 630 does not make contact with valve bottom wall 621, so it is minimum required height, and this prevents increases in the scale of direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500
Valve inner circumferential wall 629 which is formed in a rough that covers the outer circumferential surface of spring top part 632 spring 630, is provided on the outside of valve bearing part 628 and o ink flow path 627 This valve inner circumferential wall 629 is provi restrict the movement of first supply spring 630 in a direction that is axial center 01, and first supply spring 630 is accurately bent in t axial center Ol by restricting the movement of first supply spring 630 that is orthogonal to axial center 01 larger diameter), ring shaped spring top part 632, which is formed w that is smaller than the diameter of this spring bottom part 631 and part of the upper surface of first supply spring 630 (end of the side wi diameter) and spring plastic part 633, which is connected between part 632 and spring bottom part 631 and bends and deforms when a in the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 ( direction of supply valve 620 that is pressed into needle 49 (see Fig biased direction of first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 6 part 632 makes contact with valve bearing part 628 of supply Figure 25) and forms a pressing part that presses supply valve 620 i of supply joint 610 (see Figure 24) The diameter of spring bottom par such that it is larger than the diameter of spring top part 632, so spri
631 forms the base when spring plastic part 633 is elastically deform
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), ink flow path 634 which communi tip of spring top part 632 (right end surface in Figure 26(d)) to the bot spring bottom part 631 (left end surface in Figure 26(d)), is formed spring 630 This ink flow path 634 consists of top part flow path demarcated by the inner circumferential surface of spring top part 63 flow path 634b, which is demarcated by the inner circumferential su plastic part 633, and bottom part flow path 634c, which is demarcate circumferential surface of spring bottom part 631 As illustrated in Fi area of the opening of this ink flow path 634 gradually increases f spring top part 632 towards the bottom surface of spring bottom part as illustrated in Figures 26(b) and 26(c), top part flow path 634a of s
632 is formed m a circular shape from the perspective of the direction to the page When spring plastic part 633 is curved and formed i reversed bowl shape that is convex on the side moving away from a and it is not possible to send ink to multifunction device 1 (see Figu As a result, the quality of printing by multifunction device 1 decre when the opening of top part flow path 634a is formed into a quadr the four corners are not blocked even if air bubbles that grow la opening surface of top part flow path 634a accumulate, so it is pos decreases in printing quality by preventing the ink flow path from Further, the opening surface of top part flow path 634a is not quadrilateral, and it may alternatively be formed into a polyg hexahedron or a star shape As in this embodiment, even if it is circ formed with a diameter with which the effects of air bubbles would b
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), spring top part 632 is formed in thick cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial center formed such that the cross sectional shape perpendicular to the dir center Ol (biased direction of first supply spring 630) is uniform Si bottom part 631 is also formed into a relatively thick cylindrical shap in the direction of axial center 01, and it is formed such that the shape perpendicular to the direction of axial center Ol is uniform
As illustrated in Figure 26(d) spring plastic part 633 is formed reversed bowl shape (or roughly conical shape) that curves (or prescribed angle in the direction of axial center Ol As a result, the respect to loading in the direction of axial center Ol become weak in spring bottom part 631 and spring top part 632 Furthermore, spri 633 is formed such that it has a thinner profile than spring bottom spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength Accordingly, wh spring 630 elastically deforms, spring plastic 633 plastically deforms
Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that spring 630, and the composition of second supply spring 650 cons Figure 27 is a diagram that shows supply slider 640 Figure 27(a that shows a side view of supply slider 640, Figure 27(b) is a diagra side view ,of supply slider 640 from the perspective of arrow XXVIIb i Figure 27(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply slider 64 is a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply slider 640, and Fi cross sectional view of supply slider 640 through line XXVIIe XX 27(c)
Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a hig hardness than first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) and second sup and it is primarily equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 64 the outer periphery of supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting 642b, which project from this slider outer circumferential wall 641 i of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, a pair of slider loose i 643 which extend from slider outer circumferential wall 641 to th slider projecting wall 642a (upper side end in Figure 27(a)) and are lo into valve guide grooves 623 of supply valve 620 (see Figure 25), slider 644, either side on which first and second supply springs 630 and 650 which is formed on the inside of slider outer circumferential wall 6 contact with spring bottom parts 631 and 651 of first and second sp 650 and slider through hole 645, which is formed in the center pos platform part 644 and connects the top and bottom of slider platform clear from Figure 27(c), slider projecting walls 642a and 642b [symmetrically] such that they sandwich axial center 01, and the pair insertion parts 643 is also positioned [symmetrically] such that they s center Ol
The inside diameter of slider outer circumferential wall 641 is for it is roughly equivalent to the outside diameter spring lower parts 6 circumferential wall 641 and slider protruding part 642), so when t inserted into valve guide grooves 623 (see Figure 25), they are mov the direction of axial center Ol of supply slider 640, and misali direction orthogonal to the direction of axial center Ol can be preven
Figure 28 is a diagram that shows valve seat 660 Figure 28(a) is shows a side view of valve seat 660 Figure 28(b) is a diagram that view of valve seat 660, Figure 28(c) is a diagram that shows a botto seat 660, and Figure 28(d) is a cross sectional view of valve seat 66 XXVIIId XXVIIId in Figure 28(b)
As illustrated in Figure 28(a), valve seat 660 is equipped with val part 661, which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and with spring top part 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat 662 which are placed on the top surface of this valve seat bottom p side in Figure 28(a)) Each valve seat bearing part 662 is equipped sloping surface 662a, which slopes downward as it approaches the c seat 660, and check valve 670 which will be described below, is re valve seat sloping surface 662a
As illustrated in Figure 28(b), six valve seat bearing parts 662 ar prescribed spacing in the circumferential direction of valve seat 66 seat through holes 662b, which pass through the front and back of v are formed on three of the six valve seat bearing parts These fi through holes 662b are formed on a portion other than valve seat s 662a of valve seat bearing part 662 (horizontal portion of valve sea 662) Therefore, because first valve seat through holes 662b are forme that differs from the portion that receives check valve 670, the block flow path can be prevented
Moreover second valve seat through holes 663, which pass thro bottom surface of valve seat bottom part 661 These valve seat c grooves 664 connect second valve seat through holes 663 to one anoth linear manner on the bottom surface of valve seat bottom part 661 T valve seat communicating grooves 664, which intersect at axial c formed Moreover, a pair of valve projecting parts 665 which pro bottom surface, is formed on the bottom surface of valve seat bot Spring top part 652 of second supply spring is housed in each of th projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumfe of spring top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of secon 650 in the direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
As illustrated in Figure 28(d), a gap is formed between valv surface 662a of valve seat bearing parts 662 and second valve seat 663 in the direction of axial center Ol As a result, even if chec supported on valve seat sloping surface 662a, the flow path of the i Moreover, even if the end surface of spring top part 632 of second sup makes contact with the bottom surfaces of second valve seat thro second valve seat through holes 663 are positioned to the outside circumference of valve seat projecting part 664 (virtual line R in Fi the flow path of the ink is secured by valve seat communicating groo seat communicating grooves 664 connect all of the second valve seat 663, so even if there are second valve seat through holes 663 that a valve seat projecting part 665, the ink flow path can be reliably secur
Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670 Figure 29(a) is shows a side view of check valve 670, Figure 29(b) is a diagram that view of check valve 670, Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a botto valve 670, and Figure 29(c) is a cross sectional view of check valve 67 XXIXd XXIXd in Figure 29(a) which is formed with a thin profile adheres to cover 680 as it is elasti so it is possible to reliably block the ink flow path communication bet and check valve 670
As illustrated in Figure 29(a), the bottom surface of umbrella par in a curved shape and is supported by valve seat bearing parts 662 of (see Figure 28), so the flow path of the ink is opened in the state in part 671 is supported by valve seat bearings 662 of valve seat 660, path of the ink is blocked in the state in which umbrella part 671 of c makes contact with cover 680
Shaft part 672 is a part that is inserted into second cover throug Figure 30) of cover 680, which will be described below This sha positioned in the vicinity of cover 680 in the state in which it is att 680, and it has ball part 672a, which is formed into a roughly spheric ball part 672a is formed with a diameter that is greater than that o through hole 684 of cover 680, and it prevents check valve 670 from it is attached to cover 680 As a result it is possible to reduce the loss 670 when manufacturing ink cartridge 14, and operationally is impr
Figure 30 is a diagram that shows cover 680 Figure 30(a) is a shows a side view of cover 680 Figure 30(b) is a diagram that shows cover 680, Figure 30(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of c Figure 30(d) is a cross sectional view of cover 680 through line Figure 30(b)
Cover 680 is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape in which the side (side of valve seat 660 (see Figure 28)) is opened Cover 680 is cover outer circumferential wall 681 which forms the outer periphery, part 682, which forms the top surface of cover 680 (upper side in Fig it is formed such that the bottom surface side is opened Valve seat 66 are blocked, and the ink flow path is thus also blocked
Moreover second cover through hole 684, into which shaft par valve 670 is inserted, is formed in the center of cover top part 682 (p through axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500) Shaft par valve 670 is inserted into this second cover through hole 684, and che thereby attached Even m the state in which check valve 670 is insert cover through hole 684, the flow path of the ink is formed on a portio circumferential surface However, when umbrella part 671 of check va contact with cover top part 682, the entire first cover through hole is ink flow path of second cover through hole 684 formed in simultaneously blocked
Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 3l(b that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700 from the perspective o in Figure 3l(a), Figure 3l(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of a 700, Figure 3l(d) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient ai Figure 3l(e) is a cross sectional view of ambient air cap 700 XXXIe XXXIe in Figure 3l(c)
As illustrated in Figure 3l(a), ambient air cap 700 is equipped cylindrical ambient air securing part 701 which forms the side wall o air cap 700 and is fastened to ambient air intake element 117 (see F ambient air cap bottom wall 702, which forms the bottom wall of a 700 Engagement holes 703a and 703b (see Figure 3l(b) for engagem which are formed from the bottom part of ambient air securing part 7 in Figure 3l(a)) to the vicinity of the top part (vicinity of the end of th Figure 3l(a)) and are engaged with protruding parts 117a and 117b intake element 117 described above when ambient air cap 700 i 1 in Figure 3l(d), ambient air cap insertion hole 705, into which joint (see Figure 32) of ambient air joint 710, which will be described be open part 721a (see Figure 33) of ambient air valve 720 are inserted, roughly central position on ambient air cap bottom wall 702 Ambie (see Figure 32) is housed such that it makes contact with the in ambient air cap bottom wall 702 and the inner circumferential surf air securing part 701
When ambient air cap 700 is attached to ambient air intake protruding parts 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 p outer circumferential direction, as with supply cap 600, so ambient attached as it increases in diameter in the outer circumferen Therefore when ambient air cap 700 is to be attached, it can be att applying strong pressure, so it is possible to improve the installa while reducing damage to ambient air cap 700
Figure 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(b that shows a plan view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(c) is a shows a bottom view of ambient air joint 710, and Figure 32(d) is a view of ambient air joint 710 through line XXXIId XXXIId in Figure
As illustrated in Figure 32(a), ambient air joint 710 is formed in f a side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular Figure 32(a)) The part illustrated in the second step from the bottom Figure 32(a)) is joint outer circumference part 711, which is the pa contact with the inner circumferential surface of ambient air securin Figure 31) of ambient air cap 700 and ambient air cap bottom wall the outer circumference part of ambient air joint 710 The part illustr step of this joint outer circumference part 711 is joint inner circumfer As illustrated in Figure 32(b), the axial center of joint outer circ 711, joint inner circumference part 712, joint contact part 713, and j 714 is positioned on the same axial center as in the direction of axi ambient air intake mechanism 510 Moreover, ambient air joint 710 elastic material such as a resm rubber, so when ink cartridge 14 multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), joint skirt part 714, which is thin profile makes contact with the end surface of multifunction d elastically deformed
As illustrated in Figure 32(d), joint contact part 713 projects fr 712a of joint inner circumference part 712 (surface on the side that with ambient air valve 720) Joint contact part 713 is formed such t toward tip 713a (upper end part in Figure 32(d)), and this tip 713a with the bottom surface of ambient air valve 720 and blocks the amb path Moreover as illustrated m Figure 32(d), joint passage 715 whi the bottom surface of joint inner circumference part 712 to tip 713a part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32(d)), is formed on am 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720 is inserted passage 715
Figure 33 is a diagram that shows ambient air valve 720 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air valve 720, and Fig diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient air valve 720 Ambien has a configuration in which valve open part 721a, which projects fr surface of valve bottom wall 721 and opens the ambient air intake p contact with the side of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), is a valve 620 Therefore, detailed descriptions of valve bottom wall 72 circumferential wall 722, valve protruding part 722a, valve guide gro projecting wall 724, valve constraining part 725, valve hook part 72 part (lower end surface in Figure 22) to valve bottom wall 721 circumferential direction, is formed on the outer circumferential s open part 721a This valve open part 721a passes into joint passage 32) of ambient air joint 710 described above, and a portion of it is outside of ambient air cap 700 (see Figure 31) When ink cartridge 1 multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), valve open part 721a makes co end surface of multifunction device 1 and the contact with joint co (tip 713a) of ambient air joint 710 is broken, thus forming an amb path
When ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 and v 721a operates, joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 also mak the end surface of multifunction device 1 and elastically deforms, a communication between the ambient air intake path and the outsid part 714 As a result, ambient air that is introduced from the side o device 1 can be introduced smoothly Moreover, even if joint s elastically deforms toward axial center 02 and makes contact with v 721a, the ambient air intake path can be secured by convex part 721 part 721a It is therefore possible to prevent the ambient air intake p blocked and ensure that ambient air is introduced into ink reservoi (see Figure 14)
Next the state in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambi mechanism 510 are installed into ink supply element 116 and ambi element 117 will be described with reference to Figure 34 Figure cross sectional view that shows the state in which ink supply mech ambient air intake mechanism 510 are installed into ink supply ele ambient air intake element 117
As illustrated in Figure 34, ink supply mechanism 500 is ins stepped shape that can house cover 680 Cover 680 is inserted such contact with stepped surface 801a of this projecting wall 801, which i stepped shape, and the position on the side of first supply communic of ink supply mechanism 500 is thus determined
Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is inserted into second cover th of cover 680, and valve seat 660 is arranged such that it houses this c inside cover 680 Second supply spring 650 is arranged on the bottom this valve seat 660 (left side in Figure 34), and supply slider 640 is that it houses this second supply spring 650 First supply spring 63 supply slider 640 on the opposite side of second supply spring 650, a spring 630 is arranged between supply slider 640 and supply valve supply joint 610 is arranged such that it makes contact with the bot supply valve 620, and supply cap 600 is fastened to the outside element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of th 610 Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts of ink supply element 116 so the position on the outside of ink supp 500 is determined Therefore, the position of the direction of axial ce supply mechanism 500 is determined by supply cap 600 and stepped s inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116
The inside diameter of inner circumferential surface 800 of ink s 116 is formed such that it is slightly larger than the outside diam valve 620, and it is configured such that the operation of supply va direction of axial center Ol can be performed smoothly inside ink s 116 As described above, four valve protruding parts 622a are forme circumferential surface of supply valve 620, and it is configured contact surface with inner circumferential surface 800 is small The supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal direction with respect to a sandwiched by spring bottom part 631 of first supply spring 630 and part 631 of the second spring member 650 On the contact side of s part 644 with spring bottom part 631 of second supply spring 650, it two valve hook parts 626 of supply valve 620, and movement in the di center Ol is thus restricted The space formed between supply valve slider 640 is shorter than the length of first supply spring 630 in t axial center 01, so first supply spring 630 is already plastically de position in which it is attached to ink supply element 116
Next, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which is attached t intake element 117, will be described On inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117 protruding part 811, which pro direction of ambient air intake mechanism 510 (left direction in formed on the end surface of ambient air intake passage forming p side of first ambient air communicating chamber This protrudin configured as a pair of plate shaped member, and it makes contact surface of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750 A ambient air intake path is formed between protruding part 811 and s 752 of second ambient air spring 750 Moreover the position of ambi mechanism 510 on the side of first ambient air communicatin determined as a result of second ambient air spring 750 making protruding part 811
As with the ink supply mechanism 500 side, ambient air slider 7 on ambient air intake mechanism 510 such that it houses second amb 750, and first ambient air spring 730 is housed by ambient air slid opposite side of second ambient air spring 750 while first ambient ai arranged between ambient air slider 740 and ambient air valve 7 ambient air joint 710 is arranged such that it makes contact wit intake element 117
Moreover, the space formed between ambient air valve 720 an slider 740 is shorter than the length of first ambient air spring 730 i of axial center 02, so, as with ink supply mechanism 500 first amb 730 is already plastically deformed in the position in which it is attac air intake element 117
Next, the manufacturing process of ink cartridge 14 will be reference to Figures 35 through 39 Figure 35 is a diagram tha manufacturing process before film 160 is welded Figure 36 is a explains the welding process of film 160 Figure 36(a) is a diagram th welding surface of frame part 110 onto which film 160 is welded, and a diagram that explains the welding process in which film 160 is w part 110 Figure 37 is a diagram that explains the manufacturing proc after film 160 is welded Figure 37(a) is a diagram that explains t process in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake are attached to frame part 110, Figure 37(b) is a diagram that decompression process, and Figure 37(c) is a diagram that exp dispensing process Figure 38 is a diagram that explains the installa case 200 Figure 38(a) is a diagram that explains the process in w sandwiches frame part 110, and Figure 38(b) is a diagram that explai process in which case 200 is welded Figure 39 is a diagram tha manufacturing process performed before ink cartridge 14 is shipped a diagram that explains the process in which protector 300 is attach 39(b) is a diagram that explains the process in which ink cartridge 14 packaging bag 930
As illustrated in Figure 35 in the manufacture of ink cartridge 1 470 is first attached to frame part 110 Frame part 110 and sensor ar opposite side as the side of ink supply element 116 (top of Figure 35) the opening of arm sandwiching part 425 opens on the side of se chamber opening 114 As a result, sensor arm 470 can be attached i which first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b communicate, 470 can be efficiently attached with little interference Moreover, shie 473c of arm part 473 is attached such that it is housed on the insi part 140 (inside enclosure part 141) When sensor arm 470 is at sandwiching part 425, the vertical and horizontal range of moveme arm part 473c is restricted by each wall 141a to 141d of enclosu detection part 140 In other words, once the attachment of sens complete sensor arm 470 cannot be easily detached so it is possible manufacturing process of ink cartridge 14 from becoming compl prevent sensor arm 470 from detaching from detection part 140 cartridge is transported As a result, when ink cartridge 14 i multifunction device 1, the empty ink state can be reliably de reliability of the product can be improved
In this embodiment, a supporting part that forms the axis operation of sensor arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (att 472a) of sensor arm 470 is supported on arm sandwiching part 425 110, but a configuration in which an attachment shaft is provided frame part 110 and a sandwiching part is provided on the side of s may also be used and a configuration in which sensor arm 470 and f are attached using a hinge junction would also be acceptable In o long as sensor arm 4^0 is attached such that it can rotate with respec 110 its attachment structure may take any form
When the attachment of sensor arm 470 is complete, ink dispensi then pressed inside dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing hole 452 becomes block, making it impossible to dispense ink dispensing plug 520 may be attached before sensor arm 470 is attac
As illustrated in Figure 36(a), when the attachment of sensor ar dispensing plug 520 is complete film 160 is then welded (film 160 sec Film 160 is welded to frame part 110 such that it covers both the op opening 112a and second opening 112b In other words, film 160 is sides of frame part 110 in two securing processes — a first securing pr film 160 is welded to first opening 112a (preparatory process), and a s process in which film 160 is welded to second opening 112b
As illustrated in Figure 36(b), film 160 is cut such that it is l external outline of frame part 110, and it covers frame part 110 At 160 is arranged on first opening 112a and second opening 112b witho aspirating film 160 with an aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) fr frame part 110 Ultrasound welded surface 900 of an ultrasonic weld illustrated in the figure) is then placed on film 160 such that it co circumference parts of first and second openings 112a and circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of film 160, welded to frame part 110 When film 160 is welded to each welded painted black in Figure 37(a) (outer circumference welded parts 400a inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b) are
On frame part 110, multiple inner circumference welded parts 41 411b to 417b are dispersed on the inner circumferential side of outer welded parts 400a and 400b, so if ultrasonic welding is performed wit of the welded parts the structure of ultrasound welded surface complex, and the manufacturing cost therefore increases How embodiment, ultrasound welded surface 900 of the ultrasonic wel configured such that it covers all of the welded parts (outer circumf described below As a result, gas that is present in the ink inside chamber 111 can gradually pass through film 160 and move into th between enclosure element 930 and case 200, so the generation of air the ink can be prevented Accordingly, the occurrence decreases in p due to air bubbles inside the ink can be prevented Moreover, as maintain strength and is relatively gas permeable, film 160 may b type of substance For example, a film in which a nylon film and a film are formed into two layers or a film formed by mixing nylon an or nylon and polypropylene could be used
Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is ma type of substance as the film of film 160 on the side of frame part 110 160 and frame part 110 are formed from the same material, both fil welded parts can be fused and welded reliably at the time of ultraso this embodiment, film 160 has a double layer structure Nylon films polyethylene films from the perspective of strength but their meltin so they are deficient from the perspective of welding operationahty T film 160 is formed with a double layer structure made of nylon and the strength is secured, and by using the polyethylene layer as th welded to frame part 110 welding can be performed at a low heatin so welding operationahty is secured Furthermore, the nylon layer d the welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of vicinity of the welded parts and the strength of the film in the vicinit parts can also be maintained
As illustrated in Figure 37(a), when the welding of film 160 is supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 a frame part 110 Ink supply mechanism 500 is attached to ink suppl (ink supply mechanism 500 attachment process, preparatory process) i
N 87
610, supply valve 620, first supply spring 630, supply slider 640, and spring 650 are formed as a unit inside supply cap 600 is inserte circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116, and supp secured to the outer circumferential surface of ink supply element 11 supply cap 600 is pushed in the direction of ink supply elem engagement holes 603a and 603b of supply cap 600 are engaged w parts 116a and 116b of ink supply element 116 In supply joint 6 circumference part 612 is pressed inside inner circumferential surf supply element 116, and joint outer circumference part 611 is sandw ink supply element 116 and supply cap 600 When the attachment of to ink supply element 116 is complete, the attachment of ink supply is complete and ink supply part 120 is constructed
As with the attachment of ink supply mechanism 500 to ink suppl the attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 to ambient air i 117 (attachment process) is performed in a process in which a compo ambient air joint 710, ambient air valve 720, first ambient air sprin air slider 740, and second ambient air spring 750 are formed as a u air cap 700 is inserted inside inner circumferential surface 810 o intake element 117 and ambient air cap 700 is fixed to the outer c surface of ambient air intake element 117 At this time, ambient pushed to the side of ambient air intake element 117 and engagem and 703b of ambient air cap 700 are engaged with protruding parts of ambient air intake element 117 In ambient air joint 710 circumference part 712 is pressed inside inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117, and joint outer circumference sandwiched between ambient air intake element 117 and ambien When the attachment of ambient air cap 700 to ambient air intake frame part 110, suction tube 911 of pressure reducing device 910 i into supply joint 610 of ink supply mechanism 500and supply valve by suction tube 911, thus opening the ink flow path Suction pump ( activated and the ambient air inside frame part 110 is aspirated T inside frame part 110 is aspirated by pressure reducing device 91 reaches a prescribed pressure (pressure that is at least lower tha pressure), suction pump 912 is stopped, and suction tube 911 is rem supply part 120 When suction tube 911 is removed from ink supply p valve 620 makes contact with joint contact part 613 of supply joint elastic force of first and second supply springs 630 and 650, and the fl ink is thus blocked, so the decompressed state is maintained
As illustrated in Figure 37(c), when the decompression inside fra complete after the decompression process, ink dispensing needle 920 i ink dispensing plug 520, and ink is dispensed into frame part 110 chamber 111) (ink dispensing process) The inside of ink reservoir c depressurized, so the ink is swiftly dispensed into ink reservoir cha when a prescribed amount of ink has been dispensed, dispensing removed and the ink dispensing process is completed The air press reservoir chamber 111 after ink is dispensed is air pressure pi (f Moreover, "a prescribed amount of ink" refers to the quantity for surface I of the ink drops below second ambient air communicating third ambient an* communicating hole 436 of ambient air communic forming part 430, as illustrated in Figure 37(c) Therefore, when in the penetration of mk into ambient air connection passage 433 can b purpose for not dispensing ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 u space is left inside mk reservoir chamber 111 is to, as described abov damage or deformation of film 160 Moreover, the region below liqu complete, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is in the state (air pressure pi) Therefore, there are cases in which decompression process is not required after the ink dispensing subsequent decompression process were not performed, the manufa could be simplified However, the air pressure pi inside ink reservoi after the ink is dispensed is not necessarily within a prescribed ra embodiment, a subsequent decompression process is performed in the air pressure to a level withm the prescribed range (in order to co air pressure is within the prescribed range)
Here, although it is not illustrated in the figures the subsequent process that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be subsequent decompression process is performed using ink dispensi which was inserted into ink dispensing plug 520 In other words, a that supplies ink (not illustrated in the figure) and a pressure reduc reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambient air inside frame illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing needle 920 ink is completely dispensed, the flow path is switched and decomp pressure reducing device is begun The air pressure p3 (third press reservoir chamber 111 after subsequent decompression is performe the air pressure pi inside ink reservoir chamber 111 after the in Therefore the quantity of gas inside ink reservoir chamber 111 furth a result of the subsequent decompression process, so the generation mside the ink can be prevented, and the deterioration of printing qu bubbles can be avoided Moreover, the ink that flows in at the ti dispensing process collides with the inside surface inside ink reservoi so air bubbles are more likely to generate, but the air bubbles generat can be removed Further, the device may also be configured dispensing path Therefore, the amount of ink that is dispensed nev to subsequent decompression, so it is possible to reliably dispens amount of ink
Although it is not illustrated in the figures, when the decompression) of the ink is complete, in dispensing plug 520 is p makes contact with bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 45 on the side of ink reservoir chamber 111) Therefore, after ink dispens pressed to bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451, fi communicating hole 452 is blocked by the outer circumferential dispensing plug 520, so even if the dispensing needle is mistakenly again, the ink is not dispensed In other words, in the manufacturing cartridge 14, it is possible to prevent the dispensing process from be twice and to prevent the occurrence of defective products
As illustrated in Figure 38(a), when the dispensing (or decompres is complete, the manufacture of ink reservoir element 110 is comple 200 is then assembled (case 200 assembly process) Case 200 (first a members 210 and 220) is molded by injection molding, and it is m advance (third molding process)
As described above, in the assembly of cover 200, rod members 215a to 2 member 210 are inserted into three through-holes 460a to 460c (see Figure 14 f 460b and 460c), which are formed on the outer circumference part of frame p reservoir element 110 is thus installed in first case member 210 At this time, 120 (supply cap 600) and ambient air intake part 130 (ambient air cap 700) engaged with case cutout parts 211 and 212, and the outer wall of ink supply circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of ambient air int (outer circumferential surface of ambient air cap 700) make contact with cont and 212a Second case member 220 is then attached such that case fitting ho 225c (not illustrated m the figure) of second case member 220 engage with ro and second case members 210 and 220, first case welded part 21 member 210 and first case welded part 226 of second case member 2 together, and second case welded part 217 of first case member 210 a welded part 227 of second case member 220 are welded together indicated by the diagonal lines in Figure 38(b) are welded) In this e entire first and second welded parts 226 and 227 are welded in the ca process but several spots may be partially welded instead In other as the parts are welded such that case 200 does not peel during tran does not easily peel due to human actions, any welding range or w may be used
In this embodiment first and second case members 210 and 220 after the ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first a members 210 and 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultras absorbed by the ink Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations welded parts of frame part 110 or film 160 are damaged or film 160 p of vibration accompanying the welding of case 200 Moreover wh parts of first and second case members 210 and 220 are partiall generation of vibration due to ultrasonic welding is reduced, so the d part or the peeling of film 160 can be further reduced
As illustrated in Figure 38(b), case projecting parts 214a a projecting part 214a is not illustrated in the figure) and case projecti and 224b (case projecting part 214b is not illustrated in the figure) p from ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 Theref cartridge 14 is to be installed in inkjet recording device 1, even if ink dropped, case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 224a, and 224b make im ground, so the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intak be prevented Further, the opening of the ambient air intake path or projecting cutout parts 214b and 224b of first and second case membe and protector 300 is thus attached to case 200 Because second p parts 330a and 330b of protector 300 elastically deform in directio from one another, protector 300 can be easily attached and detached
As illustrated in Figure 39(b), when the attachment of (attachment process) is complete, ink cartridge 14 is housed inside 930 in order to ship ink cartridge 14 (housing process) The inside of 930 is then decompressed by pressure reducing device 940 (pack packaging space decompression process) Packaging bag 930 is a ba one open end (end of the right front side of Figure 39(b)), and in process, all of the other opened portions excluding opening 931 are welded in a state m which ink cartridge 14 is enclosed Suction tube 9 reducing device 940 is inserted through this opening 931, and the am of packaging bag 930 is aspirated and reduced by activating suction p The air pressure of packaging bag 930 due to this decompression is a than the ambient pressure, but it is reduced such that it becomes a (second pressure), which is lower than air pressure p3 that is redu reservoir chamber 111 (or air pressure pi when a subsequent decompr is not performed) When decompression by pressure reducing device 9 suction tube 941 is removed and opening 931 is welded resulting in a ink cartridge 14 can be shipped The relationship between air pressu the relationship p2 < p3 < pl
Because the air pressure inside packaging bag 930 is made lowe pressure mside ink reservoir chamber 111 as a result of the pa decompression process, film 160 of ink cartridge 14 can be plasticall the side of packaging bag 930 (side of case 200) If the air pressure ms bag 930 is higher than the air pressure inside ink reservoir chambe reservoir chamber 111 so film 160 is can be deformed on the side of 930 (revertible) Therefore, even in cases in which it is not used for time, it is possible to reduce situations in which it becomes impossibl supply ink due to the solidification of film 160, and it is possible damage of film 160
Because the air pressure inside of packaging bag 930 is made low pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111, gas that remains inside chamber 111 (there is a slight amount of gas that remains due to t decompression process implemented previously) can be gradually mo reservoir chamber 111 This is because, as described above, film 160 nylon polyethylene which is relatively gas permeable, so the air p space inside ink reservoir chamber 111 and the air pressure of th packaging bag 930 and outside ink reservoir chamber 111 attempt t the equilibrium state, and the gas therefore moves to the outside f reservoir chamber 111 Accordingly, the deaeration of the ink stored i chamber 111 is promoted and it becomes more difficult for air bubbl so the printing quality can be favorably maintained
In this embodiment, ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging decompressed in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 2 makes direct contact with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink suppl packaging bag 930 deforms due to decompression Valve open part 7 the outside of ambient air intake part 130, so if packaging bag 930 contact with valve open part 721a, valve open part 721a operates an air intake path is sometimes opened If the ambient air intake path ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 leaks out Moreover, ambient a 130 and ink supply part 120 are sometimes damaged in step with the packaging bag 930 However, m this embodiment protector 300 is at according to the amount of ink stored and the color of the ink Ho embodiment, case 200 is covered after ink is dispensed into ink rese 111 of ink reservoir element 100, so common parts can be used for element 100 In other words even if the shape of the case differs, element 100 can be commonly used As a result, the manufacturi cartridge 14 can be reduced
Moreover, in ink cartridge 14, ink dispensing part 150 (ink dispen is completely concealed by case 200 such that it cannot be seen from problems m which ink spills outside as a result of the user acciden ink dispensing plug 520 can be prevented
Next, the installation method of ink cartridge 14 into multifunctio be described with reference to Figure 40 Figure 40 is a diagram t method in which ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction devic
When ink cartridge 14 is to be attached to multifunction device 1, 930 is first broken, and ink cartridge 14 is removed from the inside of 930 Then protector 300 is removed from case 200 The direction in cartridge 14 (for color, for black, and for large capacity black) is multifunction device 1 is the same
First, the internal structure of refill unit 13 of multifunction de described with reference to Figure 40(a) In refill unit 13, as described 49 is provided at a lower portion of the side of back surface 56 of case 49 projects along installation direction F (arrow F in Figure 40(a)) o 14 As is clear from Figure 40(c), this installation direction F is p longitudinal direction (direction of arrow B, X direction) of ink cartri is installed into refill unit 13 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is p needle 49 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is roughly formed int horseshoe shape, and the open end of the horseshoe shape is light emi emitted from light emitting part 57a is blocked and is not received by part 57b
As illustrated in Figure 40(a), when ink cartridge 14 (in the s protector 300 is removed) is to be installed in multifunction device 1 14 is installed such that ink supply part 120 is located below ambi part 130 This state is the regular installation position (or first p cartridge 14
Moreover, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in device 1, ink supply part 120, detection part 140, and ambient air i are sequentially arranged from bottom to top, and ink supply part part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are formed on a single end clear from Figure 40(b) this single end surface is the one side surfa positioned in the front in installation direction F when ink cartrid regular installation position Therefore, because ink supply part 120, 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are provided such that the (located close to each other) on a single end surface remaining ink de 57, needle 49, and passage 54 which are required on the side of device 1, can be consolidated (located close to each other) onto a singl surface 56) If ink supply part 120 were provided on the bottom cartridge 14 and detection part 140 and ambient air intake part 130 on the side surface of ink cartridge 14, it would become necessar needle 49 on the bottom surface side of case 40 of refill unit 13 remaining ink detection sensor 57 and passage 54 on the side of th (back surface 56) of case 40, and the scale of multifunction device 1 as these were provided, being diversified (located relatively far a other) However in this embodiment, these parts are consolidated (l each other), so the scale of multifunction device 1 can be reduced for detecting the amount of remaining ink based on whether or not in the light path of the photodetector) were used, the ink could not be fu configuration in which the ink supply opening (corresponding to ink s in this embodiment) and the irradiated part that is irradiated by (detection part 140) are both provided on a single end surfac embodiment In other words with a configuration in which the irr positioned below the ink supply opening, the position of the ink s becomes relatively high, so ink that is stored below the ink supply over, and the consumption efficiency thus diminishes With a configur the irradiated part is positioned above the ink supply opening, the irradiated part becomes relatively high so a significant quantity of i when the photodetector detects the absence of ink, and when the use the absence of ink based on the detection results of the photodetector, ink that is left over becomes large However, in this embodiment, sen used, so even if the irradiated part is provided in a relatively hig absence of ink can be detected in step with the timing in which the ac remaining ink becomes low, and the ink supply opening is provided in so there is little leftover ink (The description is given out of place b ink detection method using sensor arm 470 will be described in detail
As long as the configuration of the ink cartridge is such that t opening is provided on the bottom surface of the ink cartridge and part is provided on the side surface of the ink cartridge, ink will be ful a method that directly detects the presence of ink is used Howeve there is the separate problem that multifunction device 1 increases in words, only with the invention described in this embodiment can both of the scale of multifunction device 1 and the improvement of the ful realized a part that is pushed such that it makes contact with pressing retaini
As illustrated in Figure 40(b), when ink cartridge 14 is in the stat pushed mside refill unit 13 in installation direction F, protrusion 55 groove formed by case protruding grooves 214b2 and 224b2 Furt needle 49 is positioned inside supply cap 600 of ink supply part 120 of ink cartridge 14 in the horizontal direction (direction toward the front side of Figure 40(b)) is restricted by protrusion 55 and protr 214b2 and 224b2, and the movement in the vertical direction is restri plate part 42 and ceding plate part 44 of refill unit 13 so it is possible cartridge 14 from being inserted diagonally and prevent remaining sensor 57 and needle 49 from being damaged
When the door member 60 is rotated from the state of Figure direction of the arrow illustrated in Figure 40 (b) the pushing retaini of the door member 60 contacts the push part 200a forming a porti surface of the ink cartridge 14, pushing the ink cartridge 14 in t direction F As the door member 60 is rotated further, the door lock the door member 60 fits into the lock member fitting part 46 of the completing the installation of the ink cartridge 14 (the state of Figu middle point p illustrated in Figure 40 (c) is the central position i direction (height direction) of the ink cartridge 14 The position whe retaining member 61 pushes the push part 200a is a position includi point p of the ink cartridge 14 and extending below the middle poi words, the push part 200a is provided at a position above the ink s and below the ambient air intake part 130 in the vertical direct illustration and description of this will be omitted, when the state of reached, the tip of the swing arm mechanism 44b fits into the latch p 227a and retains the ink cartridge 14 through hole formed by the case cutout parts 213 and 223 and the 140 when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the refill unit 13 the part 57a and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detec become positioned inside the case 200 Thus, it becomes possible to p to the remaining ink detection sensor 57, as well as preventing misd dirt, dust or the like adhering to the light emitting part 57a and light 57b
Furthermore, since the pushing retaining member 61 is impell spring 66 as described above, it can stably retain the ink cartridge 14 cartridge 14 has been installed (or is being installed) in the refill unit force of the spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750 of the ink supply and the ambient air intake mechanism 510 act in the direction awa on which needle 49 is arranged (leftward in Figure 40» in the directi the installation direction) As described above, the pushing retaining configured to have a greater elastic force than the elastic force ge spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able to stably cartridge 14 once it has been installed Furthermore the push par depressed by the pushing retaining member 61 is located substa middle between the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air int allowing a substantially uniform elastic force to be applied to the i 120 and the ambient air intake part 130 This is because the ink c retained at three points in the installation direction of the ink cart point at the front of the refill unit 13 (the pushing retaining membe points at the back of the refill unit 13 (the ink supply part 120 and t intake part 130), with the imaginary line linking these three p substantially an isosceles triangle shape Thus, retaining the ink c three points allows the ink cartridge 14 to be retained stably Furt ink cartridge 14 at a prescribed position The pivot of rotation of the 60 is located at a lower portion of the case 40, and the user performs t opening and closing the door member by manipulating the edge pa member 60 Thus, if the push part 200a is arranged at the upper p surface of the ink cartridge 14 the point of action at which the pus member 61 pushes the ink cartridge 14 will be at a distance fro rotation of the door member 60 thus requiring a large force for the u door member On the other hand, if the push part 200a is arranged lower part of the back surface, for instance below the ink supply par will be able to close the door member with minimum force, but since lower part of the ink cartridge 14 is pushed, the ink cartridge 14 m rotate and be pushed in tilted, so the needle 49 may not be inserted the ink supply part 120 However, according to the present embodi push part 200a is arranged below the middle position of the ink cartr height direction and above the position corresponding to the ink sup large force is not required to operate the door member, making it pos install the ink cartridge at the prescribed location
Here, referring to Figure 41 the operation of the ink supply mech the ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ink cartridge 14 is i multifunction device 1 will be described Figure 41 is a drawing il state with the ink cartridge 14 having been installed in the multifun Since Figure 41 is drawing for the purpose of explaining the operat supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction device 1 and the like have been om drawing
As illustrated in Figure 41, when the ink cartridge 14 is in multifunction device 1 (inside the refill unit 13), the light emitting pa will be described later
With regard to the ink supply mechanism 500, when the ink c installed in the multifunction device 1, the needle 49 is inserted thr surrounded by the sloping wall 606d of the supply cap 600, the insert the supply cap 600 and the ink flow path 615 of the supply joint 600 and the tip of the needle 49 contacts the valve bottom wall 621 of th 620, depressing the supply valve 620 As a result, the supply valve 6 from the joint contact part 613 of the supply joint 610, forming an ink needle 49 communicates with a discharge opening (not illust multifunction device 1 via ink extraction opening 52 and ink tube 53 in the tip of the needle 49, a cutout 49a is formed for securing an in that an ink flow path is secured by the cutout 49a even if the tip of contacts the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620
Here, the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 when the su is depressed by the needle 49 will be described The first supply spri inside the supply valve 620 (and supply slider 640), as described slightly flexed spring flexible part 633 On the other hand, there is n spring flexible part 653 of the second supply spring 650 arranged o side of the supply slider 640 from the first supply spring 630 determine the flexing order of the first and second supply springs 6 other words, the first supply spring 630 with the flexed spring fle flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that when t inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second sup flexes thereafter
Here, the height of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direct comprises dimensional error from the manufacturing of the various c the more components there are, the more likely that dimensional er becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of misalignment in th displacement when the supply slider 640 operates in the direction of ink supply mechanism 500 Furthermore, the inside diameter of t circumferential wall 641 and the outside diameter of the spring bot and 651 of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are substantially equal Thus, it becomes possible to reduce misalig direction orthogonal to axis Ol (the up down direction in Figure 41) and second spring members 630 and 650 are arranged on the slider 644 of the supply slider 640 Furthermore, while the external shap outer circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 is formed sl than the inside diameter of the ink supply element 116, since the va part 622a is formed outward from the valve outer circumferential supply valve 620, it becomes possible to prevent misalignment in t displacement when the supply valve 620 operates in the directio Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis Ol becomes
Furthermore when the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply depressed by the needle 49 and moves in the direction of valve seat 6 in Figure 41), accompanying this movement, the first supply spring deformed so as to become compressed, whereupon the supply slider the direction of valve seat 660 (the direction opposite to the impelli the first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 650) and the spring undergoes flexible deformation This state is the state illustr 41
Once the ink cartridge 14 has been installed in the case 40 of the device 1, the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 also u deformation, forming an ink flow path K indicated by arrow K The in is a flow path formed between the ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figu the valve outer circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 circumferential surface of the ink supply member 116 is also an ink fl
Here, the operation of the supply joint 610 when the needle 49 is i the supply joint 610 will be described When the needle 49 is press protruding part flow path 615b through the step part flow path 6 protruding part 614 is pulled by the needle 49 due to the friction be inner circumferential surface 614a and the outer circumferential needle 49 and is displaced m the direction of insertion (to the right i the needle 49 (displaced into the contact part flow path 615c) Here, th part 613 has a structure cut out into a countersunk shape so the di the joint protruding part 614 in the direction of insertion of the ne transmitted directly to the tip 613a of the joint contact part 613 In ot tip 613a of the joint contact part 613 is hardly displaced in the directi but is slightly displaced in a direction away from the needle 49 T change of the supply joint 610 accompanying insertion of the needle the joint contact parts 613 are displaced away from each other Assu contact part 613 had a shape with a gently sloping surface going f circumferential surface 614a of the joint protruding part 614 to the t joint contact part 613, as the needle 49 was inserted the joint protr would deform so as to be displaced in the direction of insertion of the deformation of the joint protruding part 614 would be directly tran joint contact part 613, and the joint contact part 613 would be di direction of insertion together with the joint protruding part 614 A insertion stroke of the needle 49 for forming an ink flow path betwe valve 620 and the joint contact part 613 would become longer, so would have to be made longer Furthermore, as the needle 49 beco becomes more likely to be damaged by contact with other members, needle 49 is withdrawn whereupon the valve bottom wall 621 of th 620 contacts the joint contact part 613, obstructing the ink flow pat second supply spring 650 becomes fully stretched, while the first sup returns to a slightly flexed deformed state
When the ink cartridge 14 is removed form the multifunction d needle 49 is withdrawn, the ink present in the vicinity of the ink fl the supply joint 610 (the contact part flow path 615c and the protru path 615b) flows toward the ink cap 600 (leftward in Figure 41) and the step part flow path 615a However, since the quantity of ink whic the step part flow path 615a is minute, the ink is retained by the ca the step part of the step part flow path 615a, so that its outflow to the ink cartridge 14 can be reduced Furthermore even if it flows out fro flow path 615a, since the opening part of the ink storage part 602 of 600 is wider than the opening 612c of the step part flow path 615a, t out flows into the ink storing part 607 of the ink supply cap 600 becomes possible to reliably prevent ink from flowing out of the ink c
Next, the ambient air intake mechanism 510 side will be des ambient air intake mechanism 510, when the ink cartridge 14 is i multifunction device 1, the valve opening part 721a of the ambient contacts the back surface 56 of the case 40, depressing the ambient ai a result, the ambient air valve 720 is moved away from the joint cont the ambient air joint 710 forming an ambient air intake path L as arrow L m the drawings Furthermore, when the valve opening pa ambient air valve 720 contacts and is depressed by the back surfac stroke part 714 of the ambient air joint 710 contacts the back surfa joint skirt part 714 undergoes flexible deformation so as to expand ( diameter As a result, it becomes tightly held against the back surfac flexible part 753 of the second ambient air spring 750 Thus, the fl determined for the first and second ambient air springs 730 and 750
Furthermore, the inside diameter of the valve outer circumferent the ambient air valve 720 and the inside diameter of the circumferential wall 741 of the ambient air valve 720 are formed to b equal Thus, the occurrence of misalignment in the direction of displ the ambient air slider 740 operates in the direction of axis 02 of t intake mechanism 510 can be prevented Furthermore, the inside d slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the outside diameters of the parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air spring member are formed to be substantially equal Thus, it becomes possib misalignment in the direction orthogonal to axis 02 (the up dow Figure 41) when the first and second ambient air springs 730 and 75 on the slider pedestal part 744 of the ambient air slider 740
Furthermore, while the outside shape of the valve outer circu 722 of the ambient air valve 720 is formed slightly smaller than the i of the ambient air intake element 117, since valve protruding part 7 outward from the valve outer circumferential wall 722 of the ambient misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient operates in the direction of axis 02 can be prevented Therefor operation in the direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mec stabilized
Furthermore, when the ambient air valve 720 is depressed by the part 721a and moves in the direction of protruding part 811 (right 41), along with the movement the first ambient air spring 730 und deformation so as to become compressed, and when the ambient ai depressed, the ambient air slider 740 moves in the direction of protr bearing part 728, the path formed between the ink flow path 7 ambient air spring 730, the slider through hole 745 of the ambient the ink flow path 754 of the second ambient air spring 750, the sprin of the second ambient air spring 750 and the protruding part 811, ambient air communicating hole 434 This flow path is the main flo which the majority of the ambient air flows Furthermore, the spac valve outer circumferential wall 722 of the ambient air valve 720 circumferential surface 810 of the ambient air intake element 117 als the ambient air intake path Subsequently, as illustrated in Figure 1 passes through the first ambient air communicating chamber 431 c opening 433a, ambient air connection passage 433, communicating second ambient air communicating chamber 432, second communicating hole 435 and third ambient air communicating ho admitted inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 When the ambient air is opened, air is taken in such that the inside of the ink reservoir c brought to ambient air pressure
As described above, the ink flow path K and the ambient air int formed when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunc Furthermore the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and t intake mechanism 510 is such that they operate smoothly misalignment relative to the axes Ol and 02 Thus, installation of th 14 is made easier, while allowing the supply of ink and the intake of be carried out reliably
Next, referring to Figure 42 and Figure 43, the method of detectin of ink remaining in the ink reservoir chamber 111 will be described drawing illustrating the operation of the sensor arm 470 according t of ink remaining in the ink reservoir chamber 111 Figure 42 (a) illust balance part 471 That is, m this description, the buoyancies and which act on the portions of the sensor arm 470 other than the balanc neglected Instead, it is considered that the buoyancies and the gr are received by the entire sensor arm 470, act on the balance par assumption the rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by the the gravity acting on the balance part 471 As illustrated in Figure state where a large amount of ink is stored in the ink reservoir cham state where the ink stored is at least above the level of the lower en circumference welded parts 415a, 415b, 416a and 416b), since the ba of the sensor arm 470 is formed from resin material with lower specifi the specific gravity of the ink, the buoyancy generated on the bal increases and the balance part 471 floats in the ink When the bala mside the ink, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the combined force of t buoyancy generated on the balance part 471 cause a rotating force to the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow Gl in Figure 43), but arm part 473c comes into contact with the arm supporting part 143 w the bottom wall 141a of the detection part 140 (enclosure part 14 placed in a position blocking the optical path between the light emi and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor state when ink is present whereby the controller (not illust multifunction device 1 discriminates the presence of ink
As the ink mside the ink reservoir chamber 111 passes through th K and decreases in quantity, the liquid surface I of the ink drops surface I of the ink drops, the blocking arm part 473c emerges on the I of the ink, and subsequently, the balance part 471 also emerges surface I of the ink When the balance part 471 emerges on the liqu the ink, the buoyancy generated on the balance part 471 which cau emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57 of the remaining ink d 57 This state is the out of ink state, in which the controller (not illu multifunction device 1 discriminates that the ink cartridge is out of i
In the foregoing description, as illustrated in Figure 42 (b), the ba is positioned near the bottom part 400bl (see Figure 15) of the chamber 111 when almost no ink remains Thus when the q remaining in the ink reservoir chamber 111 has become low, discrimination can be correctly made
As illustrated in Figure 42 (b) in the out of ink state, there is stil inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 The ink surface I at this ti higher than the part 400bl forming the bottom of the ink reservoir Furthermore, as discussed above, the ink reservoir chamber 111 and part 120 communicate via the ink supply chamber 426 (see Figure 1 the supply partition wall 422, and the ink reservoir chamber 111 and chamber 426 communicate via the second supply communicat positioned below the bottom part 400bl provided on the supply part When the liquid surface I of the ink becomes lower than the communicating hole 423, ambient air enters the area inside the su wall 422, making it impossible to supply ink Thus, in the present e detect the state immediately before ink supply becomes impossible a the sensor arm 470 is designed to rotate so that the out of ink st when the liquid surface I of the ink is above the second supply comm 423 In this way, positioning the second supply communicating hole part 400bl forming the bottom part of the ink reservoir chamber 1 possible to reliably prevent ink from running out before ink emp Furthermore when an out of ink state is discriminated there is har the bottom part 400bl of the ink reservoir chamber 111, with ink r detect the quantity of ink remaining by additionally employing a so which hypothetically determines that the device is out of ink
As illustrated in Figure 42 (a) and Figure 42 (b), the attachment attachment shaft 472a of the sensor arm 470 and of the arm sandwi of the frame part 110, i e the position of the center (pivot) about wh arm 470 rotates, is arranged below the detection part 140 and above part 120, and is positioned to the rear (to the left in Figure 42 (a) and of the supply path forming part 420 in the direction of installati cartridge 14 In the present embodiment the ink supply part 12 intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged together on one the ink cartridge 14 This allows the various mechanisms (ink supp ambient air intake mechanism and remaining ink detection mec arranged together on the refill unit 13 of the multifunction device 1 shape of the refill unit 13 from becoming complicated, and also red Furthermore, the ink supply part 120 being a part which supplies in to flow out to the multifunction device 1 is preferably arranged at th the ink cartridge 14 so as to provide for more complete utilization of the ambient air intake part 130, being a part which takes in ambie ink cartridge 14, is preferably arranged at the upper side of the in Thus, from the standpoint of space efficiency, the detection part 14 arranged between the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air intak the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment configured in this position of the center of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is arranged a same position as) tfye detection part 140, the length of the space balance part 417 and the attachment part 472 will become greater a arm 470 will become larger, and the storable quantity of ink will decli On the other hand, if the position of the center of rotation of the sen part 471 is arranged in the vicinity of the supply partition wall 42 part 471 will be near the second supply communicating hole 423 an caused by operation of the balance part 471 will be transmitte interfering with ink flow In particular, if the liquid surface I of th wavy, ambient air may enter inside the supply partition wall 42 second supply communicating hole 423, hindering the supply of in placing the balance part 471 extremely far from the supply partitio make the arm part 473 larger, so the balance part 471 will also h larger to ensure buoyancy of the balance part 471 Consequently, the which can be stored in the ink reservoir chamber 111, will decreas present embodiment, the position of the center of rotation of the sen placed in the vicinity of the supply partition wall 422 and the bala positioned at the middle of the ink reservoir chamber 111 in th avoiding the aforementioned enlargement of the sensor arm and adv
Figure imgf000111_0001
When the sensor arm 470 is attached to the arm sandwiching part ink is available, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the top end surface o arm part 473c (the upper end surface in Figure 42) is positioned parallel to the liquid surface of the ink In this state, when the liquid ink drops and reaches the same position as the top end surface of the 473c, the surface tension of the ink acts as a force to retain the shieldi the force by which the surface tension of the ink retains the shieldi greater than the buoyancy of the balance part 473a, the sensor ar operate properly
Thus in the present embodiment, the top end surface forming the detection part 140 of the shielding arm 473c is given an angle downward, reducing the portion of the shielding arm 473c that is the top and bottom are reversed relative to the proper installation o tips of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a will collide with protrusion 55 When installed with the top and bottom reversed fr installation orientation, the mk supply part 120 will be located abo air intake part 130 resulting in an incorrect orientation (or a seco with respect to the proper installation orientation
As illustrated in Figure 44, the total projection distance t9 projection distance of the protrusion 55 from the back surface 56 of t the projection distance of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a fro is longer than the projection distance t8 of the needle 49 from the member 48 Providing a difference between projection distance t8 distance t9 prevents contact between the tip of the valve openi projecting outward from the ambient air intake part 130 and the tip o The needle 49 is a member for extracting the ink inside the ink ca supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrated), so if where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately printing is not performed accurately Thus, it is not desirable for the damaged or deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve open However, by providing a difference between projection distance t8 distance t9 as described above, collision between the needle 49 opening part 721a can be prevented, thus making it possible to prev deformation of the needle 49 and allowing the ink to be reliably suppl
Furthermore, the position of the through hole (detection window) detected part 140 and the case cutouts 213 and 223 in the vertical up down direction in Figure 44) is displaced slightly from the center, the ink cartridge 14 is installed upside down from the prope orientation the remaining ink detection sensor 57 may collide with th multifunction device 1
As illustrated in Figure 45 (a), to remove the ink cartridge multifunction device 1 (refill unit 13), the lock release lever 63 of rotated forward (to the left in Figure 45 (a)) (rotated m the direction Figure 45 (a)) As discussed above, when the lock release lever 63 engagement between the door lock member 62 and the lock member is disengaged, and as a result, the door 41 can be rotated forward
A portion of the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65 of arranged inside the concave parts 216a and 226a (concave part 226a i Figure 45 (a) and is thus not illustrated) of case 200, so when rotat release lever 63, the tip of the curved part 65b of the pullout membe contacts the latch parts 216b and 226b (latch part 226b is to the rea (b) and is thus not illustrated) of the case 200 (the state of Figure 45 door 41 is rotated further forward (m the direction of the arrow in from the state of Figure 45 (b), the latch parts 216b and 226b of th pulled out by the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65, and a por cartridge 14 projects from inside the case 40 as a result (the state of From this state, the user can easily remove the ink cartridge operabihty of the ink cartridge 14 replacement operation is improved
Here referring to Figure 46, the mechanism for preventing drippi the ink cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1 wil Figure 46 is a drawing showing the state of removing the ink cartrid multifunction device 1 and a front view of the ink cartridge 14 Fig Figure 46 (b) are drawings illustrating the state change when the ink removed, and Figure 46 (c) shows a front view of the ink cartridge 14
As discussed above, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifuncti needle 49 is inserted inside the ink supply part 120 The ink supply mechanis ink cartridge 14 is removed the ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 may form of ink drops, or ink may flow down from the ink supply part 120
However, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 4 projection (first protruding part) consisting of the case projecting p 224a projects further outward (rightward in Figure 46 (b)) than the p the ink supply part 120, even if the ink adhering to the tip of the n down in the form of ink drops or if ink flows down from the ink suppl dripped ink can be made to adhere to the ink supply part 120 side case projecting parts 214a and 224a Furthermore since the case p 214a and 224a and the ink supply part 120 are positioned relativel other, it is easy to make the ink dripping from the ink supply part 12 case projecting parts 214a and 224a
As illustrated in Figure 46 (c), the insertion hole 605 of the suppl ink supply opening into which the needle 49 is inserted and through out and the thickness til in the widthwise direction (the left rig Figure 46 (c)> the Z direction) of ink cartridge 14 of the case projecti and 224a is made longer than the diameter tlO of the insertion diameter of needle 49 is formed to be slightly narrower than the diam through hole 605 ) Furthermore, viewed vertically (form the Y insertion hole 605 is accommodated entirely within the region occupi projecting parts 214a and 224a Thus when the ink cartridge 14 is re ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 drips down or if ink flows insertion hole 605, the dripped ink can be caught by the case projecti and 224a Furthermore since the case projecting parts 214a and horizontally (in the left right direction of Figure 46 (a) and (b)) in t orientation of ink cartridge 14, and the surface on the ink supply p formed to be substantially flat, the ink adhering to the case projecti the case projecting parts 214a and 224a are at least partially locate passing through the center of communicating hole 605 (line p in Fig line passing through the center of the opening 600a of the supply c vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 (the up down direction in Figure because much of the ink dripping down from the ink supply part 120 will be able to take a downward path along line p Therefore, even i the case projecting parts 214a and 224a in the widthwise directi cartridge 14 is made shorter than the length tlO in the widthwise d insertion hole 605, a configuration of this sort can contribute to the dirtying of the refill unit 13 In this case, the ink retaining for projecting parts 214a and 224a is weakened so it can be assumed t has been caught by the case projecting parts 214a and 224a may drip refill unit 13 However, the ink cartridge 14 to be replaced is hardly long time inside the refill unit 13 in a state with the tip of the needle withdrawn from the ink supply part 120, being rather removed qu refill unit 13, so such a problem is unlikely to occur Incidentally, e case projecting parts 214a and 224a are formed to be narrow, if the in is installed in the wrong orientation, it will collide with the tip of the preventing incorrect installation Furthermore even if the case pr 214a and 224a are not accurately positioned on line p, so long as th vertically below the ink supply part 120, they will be able to catch th down from the ink supply part 120 to some extent, making it possi dirtying of the inside of the refill unit 13 to a greater extent th projecting parts 214a, and 224a were not provided
Next, referring to Figure 47, the structure, which reduces the adh the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the 14, will be described Figure 47 is a drawing illustrating the str 140
As illustrated in Figure 47 (a), when the ink cartridge 14 is i removed from the refill unit 13, ink may spatter from the projecting supply part 120 or the projecting tip of the needle 49 This is due to t ink supply mechanism 500 of the ink supply part 120 opens and close of the elastic force of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 pressure of the ink changes rapidly upon installation and remo cartridge 14 causing the ink held inside the ink supply mechanism forcefully and the fact that when the needle 49 is suddenly exposed from the state of being positioned inside the ink supply part 120 ( where the ink cartridge 14 is installed), the ink may flow back and sp spattering of ink does not occur every time the ink cartridge 14 removed and most of the time no ink may spatter
Furthermore as illustrated in Figure 47 (a), when the ink cartrid installation orientation, the detection part 140 is positioned corresponding to the remaining ink detection sensor 57, so the detect positioned above the ink supply part 120 (or needle 49) The majo spattering from the needle 49 and ink supply part 120 spatters down to the direction of detection part 140) under its own weight, so the adh the detection part 140 can be reduced simply by arranging the dete above the ink supply part 120 Furthermore, the detection surfaces are formed in a plane parallel to the line jointing the center of the dete and the cap insertion hole 605 (see Figure 47 Ob)) The majority of the from the cap insertion hole 605 spatters in substantially linear fash ink should spatter from the cap insertion hole 605, not much ink will detection surfaces 140a and 140b, making it possible to reduce the a to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b However, when the detection part 140 is in a state arranged belo air intake part 130 and above the ink supply part 120 (the state of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection part 140 wi vertically (the up down direction with reference to the direction of Figure 47 Ob)) so the ink adhering to the detection surfaces 140a and down to the ambient air intake part 130 side under its own weight since the surface of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b is formed material into a smooth plane, adhering ink can flow down easily Th possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the side surface of detec Furthermore, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed, the ink supp located at the lower part and the ambient air intake part 130 is locate part (the orientation of Figure 47 (a)), so even if there is ink a detection part 140 during installation or removal of the ink cartridge flow to the ink supply part 120 side, making it possible to reduce the to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b Moreover, as discussed above 40 of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b and the side surface 100 part 110 is formed substantially as a right angle so ink adhering t surfaces 140a and 140b can more easily flow downward due to th capillary force of the edge part 140c Therefore adhesion of ink to surfaces 140a and 140b can be reduced
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (c), the detection part 1 inside the case 200 and a space into which the light emitting part receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57 enter is f sides of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b by the case cutouts 213 the detection part 140 is covered by the case 200, so even if ink s adhesion of the spattered ink to the detection surfaces 140a and reduced Moreover, since a portion of the ink supply part 120 projects projecting parts 214b and 224b extend further outward than the i 120 Thus, if the ink cartridge 14 is inadvertently dropped, the ink s can be prevented from contacting the surface, which the ink cartridg on, making it possible to reduce outflow of ink from the ink supply p the shock of contact As a result the adhesion of the ink to the det 140a and 140b can be reduced
Next, referring to Figure 48 and Figure 49, the case 40 (see Figur unit 13 will be described Figure 48 is a drawing showing the front v 40 Figure 48 (a) is a front view of case 40, which can accommodate black or a black ink cartridges 14 and color ink cartridges 14, and Fi front view of case 2040, which can accommodate black ink cartridge ink cartridges 14 In the present embodiment, case 40 is arr multifunction device 1 but it is also possible to provide a multifu wherein case 2040 is arranged instead of case 40 Figure 49 is a cross showing the simplified cross section of cases 40 and 2040
Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is cross sectional view of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 49 shows a cross section of needle forming member 48 and in with the other elements making up the cases 40 and 2040 being om illustration Furthermore in Figures 48 to 50, a color ink cartridge is ink cartridge 14c a black ink cartridge is show as ink cartridge 14k capacity black ink cartridge is illustrated as ink cartridge 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 48 (a) case 40 is configured to accomm cartridges so that they are aligned in case 40 Regarding the arran four ink cartridges, three color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14 14kl is arranged adjacent thereto In other words, just as in case 40 cartridge 14kl is accommodated at an end position in the direction o the ink cartridges (the left right direction in Figure 48 Ob))
Since case 40 allows both a large capacity black ink cartridge 14 mk cartridge 14kl to be installed, it is formed to accommodate the t large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 Thus, the lateral width tl4 the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2> the left in Figure 48 (a)) of case 40 is longer than the lateral width tl5 (th direction of alignment of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k 1, the left rig Figure 48 Ob)) The difference between the lateral width tl4 of ca lateral width tl5 of case 2040 corresponds to the difference betwee the vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of the second case member 220 Figure 11 and the height of the vertical wall parts 2220b to 222Oe of t member 2220 illustrated in Figure 13
Furthermore, case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14k 1 or a large mk cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 204 installation of black ink cartridge 14kl This implies providing users of multifunction device 1 As already discussed above, since users w of text printing is low do not need a large capacity black ink cartri preferable to provide such users with a smaller multifunction device allow installation of a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 Furt case 2040 for installing black ink cartridges 14k 1 and case 40 for i capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 differ only slightly in external shap of the die used can be shared between the two, providing for a cost re
As illustrated in Figure 49 (a), when the ink cartridges 14c accommodated in case 40, a needle 49 penetrates into the ink supp 500 of each of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2 The gaps tl6 between accommodated inside the case 2040, a needle 49 penetrates inside mechanism 500 of each of the ink cartridges 14c and 14kl The ga needles 49 penetrating into color ink cartridges 14c and the gap tl needle 49 penetrating into the black ink cartridge 14kl and t penetrating into the adjacent color ink cartridge 14c are of the same tl6 and tl7 of case 40 This is because the state of accommodation (a orientation) of the black ink cartridge 14k 1 in case 2040 involves arra case member 1210 of the black ink cartridge 14kl on the color ink car thereby making the distance between the needle 49 penetrating into cartridge 14kl and the needle 49 penetrating into the adjacent colo 14c the same as the distance between the needle 49 penetrating capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 of case 40 and the needle 49 penet adjacent color ink cartridge 14c In other words, this is because the ink supply part 120 of the ink cartridge 14kl and the position of the i 120 of ink cartridge 14k2 are the same relative to the position of the i 120 of the ink cartridge 14c As a result, identical needle forming m be provided in case 40 and case 2040 even through the lateral widths cases 40 and 2040 may differ, making the needle forming member component and making it possible to reduce costs when fabricating t 40 and case 2040
Furthermore as discussed above, the ink supply mechanism 5 mechanism impelled by the first supply spring 630 and second supply when the ink cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1 out from the mk supply part 120 or, in the worst case, ink may spatt needles 49 are arranged continuously, without any partition plates between the needles 49 so when ink spatters from the ink supply spattered ink ends up adhering to the adjacent needles 49 The needle improve the appearance of the coloration Although there is little change when color inks are mixed together, when black ink mixes color ink, the effect of color change becomes greater so it is not desi ink to be mixed with other color inks Furthermore, when mixing colors has been confirmed, generally, recovery processing (purging) i ejection of the ink is carried out, but since ink is wasted for the recov the ink utilization efficiency drops Moreover, since black ink is a pig it has higher viscosity compared to dye type ink, so it cannot be easily if recovery processing is carried out However, in the present embod cartridges 14k 1 and 14k2 holding black ink are arranged at the end i of arrangement in the case 40, and the ink supply part 120 (and shifted away from the color ink cartridges 14c so even if black ink the spattered ink would be unlikely to adhere to the adjacent needle decline in printing quality can be suppressed, as can the wasting of of ink for recovery processing
Next, referring to Figure 50, the state of installation of the large ink cartridge 14k2 or black ink cartridge 14kl and color ink cartrid 40 will be described Figure 50 is a simplified cross section illustratin fashion the state of installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14kl and 14k2 Figure 50 (a) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14kl and 14c insta and Figure 50 (b) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14k2 and 1 case 40
As illustrated in Figure 50 (a), in the bottom plate part 42 and cei 44 of the refill unit 13 (case 40), there are formed accommodating g 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 capable respectively of accommodating the cas 216, 226 and 1216 and the case welded parts 217, 227 and 1217 of ca 1200 Accommodating grooves 42c 1 to 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 are all between distance tl2 and distance tl3 in the direction away from part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the other color ink cart left right direction m Figure 50) The difference between distance tl tl3 is the same as the difference between gap tl6 and gap tl7 betw described above, and corresponds to the difference between the hig wall parts 210b to 21Oe of the first case member 210 illustrated in Fi height of vertical wall parts 2210b to 221Oe of the first case illustrated in Figure 13, or the difference between vertical wall parts the first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the vertical w to 121Oe of the first case member 1210 illustrated in Figure 11
Furthermore, a prescribed space X is formed between the outer second case 220 of the black ink cartridge 14kl and the inner surf plate part 43 This prescribed space X is formed to allow for the large ink cartridge 14k2 Namely, as illustrated in Figure 50 (b), it serve refill unit 13 to be used for both the black ink cartridge 14kl and the black ink cartridge 14k2
As illustrated m Figure 50 (b), when a large capacity black ink ca installed in the refill unit 13, the space that would be formed whe cartridge 14k 1 is installed becomes occupied Furthermore the posit supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 are the same whe 14k 1 is installed and when ink cartridge 14k2 is installed Thus the can be used with black ink cartridges 14kl and 14k2, making it pos fabrication costs
Next, referring to Figure 51, the combination of components ma 200, 1200 and 2200 will be described Figure 51 is a schematic d schematically illustrates the combination of case members 210, 220, 1 2220 case members 2210 and 2220 (the height of vertical wall parts 2210 2220b to 222Oe of the first and second case members 2210 and 2220 direction in Figure 5l(b)) being respectively tl9, which is approxim thickness of tl8
Figure 51 (c) is a schematic drawing of case 1200 Case 1200 com second case members 1210 and 220, with the thicknesses of the fi case members 1210 and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts 1210 220b to 22Oe of the first and second case members 1210 and 220, direction in Figure 5l(c)) being tl9 for the first case member 1210 a second case member 220
Thus according to the present embodiment, three types of cases - 2200 - with different sizes of the outer shape (different inside volum from two first case members of different thickness and two second ca different thickness In the present embodiment, the thicknesses of second case members 210 and 220 forming case 200 are equal, and t of the first and second case members 2110 and 2220 forming case equal, but making the thicknesses equal in this manner is not an condition for forming three types of cases — 200, 1200 and 2200 — of shape sizes
Namely, so long as the thickness of one side (the first case memb case members making up the largest first ink cartridge (case 2200) i the thickness of one side (the first case member 210) of the case me up the smaller third ink cartridge (case 200), and the thickness of the second case member 2220) of the case members making up the la cartridge is greater than the thickness of the other side (the second 220) of the case members making up the smaller third ink cartridge, cases with different outer shape sizes can be fabricated from four c opening Thus, with three cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size, six types necessary
However, since dies are expensive, it is desirable to share the possible In the present embodiment, the second case member 220 for common with the second case member 220 for color Thus, a spe necessary for the second case member 220 for black, providing a red Moreover, the first case member 1210 for black merely involves m case member 210 for color deeper and providing a rib 1218 Thus, the vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe past the rib 1218 in the first case used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertical wall 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore, the first 1210 and 210 can be manufactured by using a common die for the the first case members 1201 and 210, and changing betwee corresponding to the first case member 210 and a member correspond case member 1210 Thus, costs can be reduced as compared to whe molds are fabricated Furthermore, since the first case member capacity black has the same shape as the first case member 1210 without the rib 1218 a common die can be used for the main portion o members 210, 1201 and 2210 In this way, even when there are multi cartridges 144c, 14k 1 and 14k2, a cost reduction can be achieved by dies as much as possible
Furthermore in cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from ea through holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air int project to the outside are made the same shape, and substantially sem cutout parts 211, 212, 221, 222, 1211 1212, 2211, 2212, 22 corresponding to one half of these through holes are formed substantially semi circular shape in the first case member 210, secon second case member of case 2200 Since the vertical wall parts 210 220b to 22Oe of case members 210 and 220 are formed to be substan height, and since the vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe and 220b t members 2210 and 2220 are formed to be substantially equal in heig shape sizes of the case 1200a and case 1200 are substantially the sa
Furthermore, it is possible to simply create a case consisting of a first case member 210 and second case member 2220 or a case c combination of first case member 2210 and second case member 220 black In other words, so long as the combination of case member cases to be created - a small case for color, a large case for lager capac medium sized case for black - any sort of combination may be used
Next, referring to Figure 52, a second embodiment will be describe a drawing illustrating the ink cartridge 3014 and refill unit 3013 embodiment Figure 52 (a) is a drawing illustrating the side surf cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment, and Figure 52 (b) shows th in the state with the ink cartridge 3014 installed in refill unit 3013
As illustrated in Figure 52 (a), the ink cartridge 3014 of the secon is configured with a different location of the ambient air intake compared to the ink cartridge 14 of the first embodiment In the ink of the second embodiment, ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge an ambient air intake passage 3131 formed in a labyrinth shape through hole 3130 formed on the top surface of the case 3200
As illustrated in Figure 52 (b), the refill unit 3013 o embodiment is configured with the position of the pushing retaining provided on the door 41 being lower than the position of the pus member 61 provided on the door 41 of the first embodiment This is b no air intake part on the side surface opposite the pushing retaining the same line, reducing tilting of the ink cartridge 3014 and allowing installed
The ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment may comprise a element 100 inside it, or may be configured such that ink is stored i 3200
Next, referring to Figure 53, the third and fourth embodiments wil Figure 53 is a perspective view illustrating the outward appeara cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments Fig perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of ink cartrid third embodiment and Figure 53 (b) is a perspective view illustratin appearance of ink cartridge 5014 of the fourth embodiment
As illustrated in Figure 53 (a), the ink cartridge 4014 of the thir has a through hole 4130 for admitting ambient air into the ink c formed in a portion of its top surface (the top surface in Figure 5 admitted through this through hole 4130 passes through a labyrin intake passage 4131 (a relatively long passage with a small inside di admitted inside the ink cartridge 4014 A seal member 4132 is gl cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow of the ink inside th 4014 before use To use the ink cartridge 4014, the seal member 413 and then the cartridge is installed in the multifunction device 1
The detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting out end surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the 4014 (the up down direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is f supply part 4120 An ink supply opening 4121 into which needle 49 formed on the projecting tip of the ink supply part 4120 The ink car the third embodiment does not have a structure corresponding to element 100, and stores the ink directly inside the case port 4121 is formed Also, the partition wall 4125 that divides the in ink cartridge 4014 and the ink supply part 4120 is formed as a singl ink cartridge 4014 itself As illustrated in Figure 53(a), this parti forms a space to store the valve mechanism
As illustrated in Figure 53(b), the ink cartridge 5014 in the fou embodiment is used in lieu of the ink supply part 4120 in the thi embodiment, forming the ink supply part 120 of the first example and the similarly shaped ink supply part 5120 The remaining struct as the ink cartridge in the third example of embodiment, and therefor explanation of this will be omitted
The detection part 4140 of the third and fourth examples of e contain the sensor arm 470 inside it, as in the first example of em contains the sensor arm 470, then in the state where the ink cartri 5014 have been attached to the multifunction device 1 it is possibl detect the amount of ink remaining Also, in the third and fourt embodiment, the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed from the c parts 214a and 224b and the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed protruding parts 214b and 224b have been omitted, but it is accept these
Next the fifth example of embodiment will be described while referring t 55 Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 m the embodiment, and Figure 55 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state i cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within the r case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment is constructed such that its ed different in relation to the case protruding parts 214a and 224a of the embodiment Therefore the structure other than the edge part of the case protr and 224a of the fifth example of embodiment is the same as that of the mk ca downwards, or in relation to the second case component 220, when seen fr Figure 54 looking upwards) (see Figure 55)
As illustrated in Figure 55, when the ink cartridge 14 that is second protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3 is attached to the refill down (in the wrong orientation), the leading edge of the protrusion 5 side will fit into the steps 214a4 and 224a4 (the step 224a4 is not ill figure) Therefore, when attaching the ink cartridge 14 upside do protrusion 55 will correctly match the steps 214a4 and 224a4, for possible to consistently prevent problems in which the protrusion 55 protruding parts 214a and 224a and goes to the upper side of the cas 55 or to the lower side of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a in thus the ink cartridge 14 is further inserted toward the back side of right side in Figure 55) Therefore, it is possible to consistently p cartridge's striking the needle 49 and thus prevent destruction or def needle 49 and the remaining ink detection sensor 57
The steps 214a4 and 224a4 of the fifth example of embodiment a L shape (or V or U shape) as seen from the side but it is also acc them corresponding to the edge shape of the protrusion 55 In ot acceptable for it to be any shape desired as long as it is a shape tha loose when attaching it in the wrong orientation and the edge of th fitted into the steps 214a4 and 224a4
Next the sixth example of embodiment will be described whi Figures 56 58 Figure 56 is a cross sectional diagram showing the sta ink cartridge 14 of the sixth example of embodiment has been inserte unit 13 Figure 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the elec of the multifunction device 1 in the sixth example of embodiment flow chart showing the ink cartridge attachment detection process t embodiment, there is an ink cartridge attachment detection sensor ink cartridge 14 has been attached to the correct attachment positi the case protruding parts 214a and 224a will press a protruding p cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 and by pressing this pr the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 will send a signal board 970 The control board 970 is a control device to perform the the multifunction device 1
As illustrated in Figure 57, the control board 970 includes a C is the calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory t overwritten and which stores the control program and the fixed valu 973 which is the memory that can be overwritten and which is use memory, the EEPROM 974 which is the non volatile memory overwritten and which stores data even after the power source is tur interface 975 which performs electrical connections between the ex and the control board 970, the mkjet printer 976 which perform discharging ink as instructed by the CPU 971, the liquid crystal d which performs each type of display the remaining ink detection se detects the amount of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and attachment detection sensor 960 that detects whether the ink cartrid attached or not, and the interface circuit 978 that performs input and type of signal While it is not illustrated in the figure there ar counters and timers included, the updating of the counter values an will be performed according to the processing performed within the C
Within the EEPROM 974, there is an ink cartridge attachment f ink cartridge attachment flag 974 will not only go on when the ink ca been correctly attached, it is a flag that will go off when the ink ca been removed Further, once the ink cartridge attachment flag 9 when the protruding piece is not pressed Also, the remaining ink d 57 will go on when the amount of light received by the light receivi below a certain level (when the light path between the light emittin the light receiving part 57b is obstructed), and it will go off when light received by the light receiving part 57b has exceeded a certain l light emitted from the light emitting part 57a is received by the light 57b)
When the ink cartridge attachment detection process is execute confirm whether the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 96 (SlOl) and if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is then there is no ink cartridge 14 attached to the multifunction devic the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a to be 0 (S 102) th will display onto the liquid crystal display part 35 that the ink cartri been attached (S 103), and this process will end In the event multifunction device 1 is being used for the first time after shippin the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a has been set to 0
As the result of confirmation by the SlOl process, if the attachment detection sensor 960 is on (SlOl Yes), it means that th 14 has been attached, and then this process will confirm whether t ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1 or not (S 104) In the even cartridge 14 is attached from the state of not being attached, the va cartridge attachment flag 974a should be 0 (S 104 No), and then this confirm whether the remaining ink detection sensor 57 is on or not timing in which the ink cartridge 14 is attached (S 105) If the r detection sensor 57 is off (S 105 No), it means that the ink cartridge the state where the shielding arm part 473c has been removed fro light emitting part 57a and the light receiving part 57b has been a ink detection sensor 57 has been already on for longer than the spec timing where the ink cartridge 14 is attached, so it is considered impurities attached to the surface of the light emitting part 57a receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, where t are obstructing the light path between these surfaces, or it is consid sensor 960 malfunctions Therefore, if the S 106 process is Yes, then a detection sensor abnormality will be displayed on the liquid crystal (S 107), and this process will end
Within the S 106 process, if the remaining ink detection sensor 5 on for longer than the specific time (S 106 No), next, this process whether or not the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 h longer than the specific time (for instance, 10 s) (S 108) As descri processing after S 104 is No" is a process to be performed in the eve cartridge 14 is attached from the state of not being attached, an cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 has already been on for l specific time, there may be damage in the ink cartridge attachment d 960 Therefore, if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 longer than the specific time (S 108 Yes), then an ink cartrid detection sensor abnormality will be displayed on the liquid crystal (S 109), and this process will end
Within the S 108 process, unless the ink cartridge attachment d 960 is on for longer than the specific time (S 108 No), when because t the ink cartridge 14 has been correctly attached, the value of the attachment flag 974a will be set to 1 (S 110), and this process will words the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 and the detection sensor 57 will change in approximately the same timing, value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 1 by detecti will end as is and if the remaining ink detection sensor 57 is off (Sil ink empty display will be displayed on the liquid crystal display 35 ( process will end
When the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1, in no error has been detected, the multifunction device 1 will allow e printing process (not illustrated in the figure), and therefore, it is po execution of the printing process in the state in which it is unclear w cartridge 14 has been attached or not '
When each of the errors has been displayed, and if there is an abn operation executed, such as an operation of the abnormal deletion b cartridge attachment flag 974a will be initialized to 0
As described above, in the sixth example of embodiment it is not o distinguish and detect the unattached state of the ink cartridge 14 ink is empty it is also possible to detect any abnormalities in eac when replacing the ink cartridge 14, as the ink cartridge attach sensor 960 will be turned off the value of the ink cartridge attach will be set to 0, and therefore, it is always possible to accurately dete ink cartridge 14 is attached or whether the ink is empty Also when ink cartridge 14 when ink is adhered to the light emitting part 5 receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, it accurately detect any abnormalities of the remaining ink detection s attaching the ink cartridge 14 Also when removing the ink cartridg cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is already broken, an ink will be displayed even though the ink cartridge 14 is not attached possible for the user to recognize that there has been some sor occurrence If an abnormal deletion operation is performed, then bec of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 0 in the even been attached), if the remaining ink detection sensor 57 changed fro acceptable to allow the execution of printing processes when the detection sensor 57 detects that the ink cartridge 14 is attached
Next, referring to Figure 59 the seventh and eighth examples will be described Figure 59 is an angled view showing the external the ink cartridges 6014 and 7014 of the seventh and eighth embodiment, Figure 59(a) is an angled view showing the external ap ink cartridge 6014 in the seventh example of embodiment, and Fig angled view showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge 701 example of embodiment The ink cartridges 6014 and 7014 of th eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the sha surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will relation to the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourt embodiment Therefore the structure other than the side surfaces on supply parts 4120 and 5120 of the seventh and eighth examples of e formed is the same as the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the thi examples of embodiment and therefore the same references for the the same as in the third and fourth examples of embodiment will be explanation of these is omitted
As illustrated in Figure 59(a), there is a concave part 6100 formed supply part 4120 (above the ink supply part 4120 in the attached s cartridge 4120 (the state in Figure 59(a)) There is a detection part 6 the central position of this concave part 6100 Therefore, on bot detection part 6140, there is a space formed in which the light emi and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection se inserted
As illustrated in Figure 59(b) there is a concave part 7100 formed adherence of ink that has flown from the ink supply parts 4120 and detection parts 6140 and 7140
It is acceptable to construct the surface of the concave parts 610 the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 side as a sloped surface that is direction of the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 By using this struct is adhered onto the detection parts 6140 and 7140, the ink will n withm the concave parts 6100 and 7100, making it possible to reduce of mk onto the detection parts 6140 and 7140
The detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the seventh and eight embodiment can also contain sensor arms inside as in the fir embodiment By using a sensor arm 470, it is possible to accurat amount of ink remaining when the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 are the multifunction device 1
Next referring to Figure 60, we will explain the ninth embodiment Figure 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge 8014 13 of the ninth example of embodiment The same parts as in the fi embodiment have the same references attached and the explanation omitted Also, while the structure of the pullout member 65 of the d 60 in the ninth example of embodiment is different to that in the fi embodiment the explanation of this will be omitted
As illustrated in Figure 60, the ink cartridge 8014 of the nin embodiment has a pushing part 8200a that is configured to contac retaining member 61 of the door main body 60 and that protrude outside from the side surface 1 of the ink cartridge 8014 In oth pushing part 200a of the first example of embodiment was one par range of the side surface 1 of the case 200, but the pressing part 820 example of embodiment has the structure where there is a spec ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment Figure 62 perspective view showing the ink cartridge 9014 of the tent embodiment Figure 63 is a diagram to explain the procedure for re reservoir element The ink cartridge 14 of the first example of emb structure in which the ink reservoir element 100 was not replaceable welded into the first and second case members 210 and 220, but in co cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment is constructed su reservoir element 100 is replaceable
Further, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodim the same structure as the ink cartridge 14 of the first example of em therefore, only the structure that is different in relation to the ink the first example of embodiment will be described, and using the sa for the same parts as in the first example of embodiment, the expla will be omitted
As illustrated in Figure 61, the ink cartridge 9014 of the ten embodiment has a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 9100 is attached onto the maximum surface 220a and the vertical wa the second case member 220 and the vertical wall part 210c and surface 210a of the first case member 210 In other words, the seal 91 to the side surface opposing the protector 300 (opposing the edge su the ink supply part 120 the ambient air intake part 130 and the dete are located) The seal 9100 not only has the model of the ink cartridge it, but it also has imprinted on it the color corresponding to the ink col is possible to visually recognize the color of the ink that is stored cartridge 9014 Therefore, by attaching this seal 9100, it is possible visually recognize the ink color, making it possible to prevent stor cartridge 9104 in the wrong accommodating chamber 50 withm the c parts 9200a and 9200b of the first case member 210 with the eng 9201a and 9201b of the second case member 920, the first case memb second case member 220 are joined Then, the seal 9100 is adhe maximum surface 210a and the vertical wall part 210c of the first ca and the maximum surface 220a and the vertical wall part 210c of t member 220 Then, by attaching the protector 300, the ink car manufactured
The ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has joining of the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 of the seal 9100 onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement ho 9201b , Therefore by undoing the union of the engagement parts 92 with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, it is possible to undo between the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 I simply perform the undoing of the connection between the engageme and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b by pressing t engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement holes 920 from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case cu to 223 have been formed
Also as illustrated in Figure 63 because one edge surface of the fi case members 210 and 220 are connected via the seal 9100, it is possi opening and closing operations using the edge of the vertical wall p 220c as an axis (an opening and closing operation in the arrow direc 63, or in the X direction) In other words the seal part 9100 is a conn to connect the first and second case members 210 and 220, and it ser material, which can open and close the first and second case member Therefore the replacement of the ink reservoir element 100 is can easily undergo the replacement of the ink reservoir element 10 example of embodiment, because detection of the remaining ink ( attachment detection of the ink cartridge) is performed by the detection sensor 57 that is placed on both sides of the detection part reservoir element 100, if an ink cartridge 9104 with no ink reservoi contained is attached, then the determination will be made tha remaining ink (or that there is no ink cartridge attached) Therefor be no printing process performed by the multifunction device 1 in the an ink cartridge 9014 with no ink reservoir element 100 contai attached, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generating printing
Next, referring to Figure 64, the eleventh example of embod described Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir eleme eleventh example of embodiment The ink reservoir element 9300 o example of embodiment is fixed within the first and second case me will omit a detailed explanation and description of the first an members
As illustrated in Figure 64, the ink reservoir element 9300 o example of embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is f injection moldemg using a resm material and a bag element flexibility and which forms a reservoir space to store the ink inside, connected to the hard part 9301 The hard part 9301 has a (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the light emittin the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 5 supply part including the ink supply mechanism 500 and the suppl first example of embodiment
Therefore, the ink reservoir element 9300 of the elevent embodiment is manufactured using the hard part 9301 and the bag according to this reduction, and when the ink is depleted, the reservo mostly depleted as well Therefore, it is not possible to place a sensor member) to detect the amount of ink remaining within the bag part 9
However, the hard part 9301 in the ink reservoir element 9300 is light barrier properties and because it is placed between the light em and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection se always block the emitted light that is emitted from the light emit Therefore, while it is not possible to detect the amount of ink remain bag part 9302, it is possible to detect whether there is an ink reservoi contained withm the first and second case members, and therefore i prevent any printing processes from being performed by the multifu while the ink reservoir element 9300 is not contained within the fi case menbers
Above, the present invention was described based on the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and it is easy to reason that it would be possible to improvements or modifications within a scope that does not diverge f of the present invention
Now, referring to Figures 65 to 67, the modified examples of the c the case members will be described Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams modified examples of the combinations of the case members As desc the present example of embodiment, the three types of cases 200, 1 and 2200 were formed with differing sizes for the outer shapes using of first case members 210 and first case members 1210 and 2210 thicknesses, and the two types of second case members 220 and secon The thickness of the case member 121 is t21 and the thickness of th r22 is t 22, which is thicker than the thickness t21 Further, the diffe the thickness t22 of the case member r22 and the thickness t21 of th r21 is different than the difference between the thickness t21 of th 121 and the thickness t20 of the case member 120
By changing the combination of the case members 121 and r22 case C2 and the case members 120 and r21 which form the case Cl, illustrated in Figure 65(c) and the case C4 as illustrated in Figure 65 More specifically, case C3 is formed of the case member 120 and th r22 and case C4 is formed of the case member 121 and the case mem
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r21 which form t the case members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small sca large scale case C2 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C4 ar the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases Cl to C4 are all diffe relationship Cl<C4<C3<C2 Therefore, it is possible to form fo different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be stored case members 120, r21 121 and r22
In this way, in the manufacture of four types of cases with differin using the four case members requires a further second condition to b above first condition This second condition is that the difference (t2 the thickness t22 of one side of the case member (case member r22) w largest first ink cartridge (case C2) and the thickness t21 of one si member (case member r2l) that forms the smallest third ink cartridg different than the difference (t21 t20) between the thickness t21 of th the case member (case member 121) that forms the largest first ink the thickness t20 of the other side of the case member (case member 1 the smallest third ink cartridge For instance, if the first condition w Next, an explanation will be made while referring to Figure 66 A Figure 66, the case C5 is formed of the case member 120 and the cas The thicknesses of the case members 120 and r20 are formed of t2 illustrated in Figure 66(b) is the same as the case C2 in Figure 65 explanation of this will be omitted
By changing the combination of the case members 120 and r20 case C5 and the case members 121 and r22 which form the case C illustrated in Figure 66(c) and the case C6 illustrated in Figure 66( More specifically, the case C3 is formed of the case member 120 and th r22, and the case C6 is formed of the case member 121 and the cas Further the difference between the thickness t20 of the case memb thickness t22 of the case member r22 is different than the differenc thickness t21 of the case member 121 and the thickness t20 of the cas fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r20 which form t the case members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small sca large scale case C2 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C6 ar the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases C2, C3, C5, and C6 ar with the relationship C5<C6<C3<C2 Therefore, it is possible to fo with different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be st four case members 120 r21, 121 and r22
Next, an explanation will be made while referring to Figure 6 illustrated in Figure 67(a) is the same as the case Cl illustrated in explanation of this will be omitted here As illustrated in Figure 67 ( is formed of the case member 122and the case member r22 The thic case members 122 and r22 are formed of t22
By changing the combination of the case members 120 and r21 Therefore using the four case members 120 and r21 which form t the case members 122 and r22 which form the case C7, the small sca large scale case C7 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C8 ar the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases Cl, C3 C7, and C8 a with the relationship Cl<C3<C8<C7 Therefore, it is possible to f with different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be st four case members 120, r21, 122 and r22
As described above, within the case members that form each c thickness of the case members that are placed on one side are diff thicknesses of the case members that are placed on the other side i form four cases with different outer sizes (different internal capac four case members
Next, another modified example of the present example of embo explained In the above example of embodiment by using the elasti and second supply springs 630 and 650 and the first and second ambi 730 and 750, the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 ar direction of the supply joint 610 and the ambient air joint 710 to blo path K and the ambient intake path L In contrast, it is also accept elasticity of the coil spring member that is formed using either a meta resm material to urge the supply valve and the ambient air valve in t the supply joint and the ambient air joint to block the ink flow path a air intake path Also, as long as the coil spring is formed such that at of it is conical, then it is also possible to reduce the scale of t mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism Also, without us slider 640 and the ambient air slider 740, it is acceptable to cons supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650 and the first amb 730 and the second ambient air spring 750 such that they are direc (740) and the first and second supply (ambient air) springs 630 an 750) as one unit, and to have a construction in which the unified s air) slider and the first and second supply (ambient air) springs can
Also while the check valve 670 was constructed of the umbrell the shaft part 672, it is acceptable to construct it of only the umbrell check valve 670 is used to prevent backflow of the ink and therefore to construct it such that it can block the connection of the first cove 683 and the second cover through hole 684 of the cover 680 Also, it i construct the cover 680 without the second cover through hole 684
Also, in the above example of embodiment, while the space bet protruding part 614 and the joint contact part 613 of the supply formed in a circular base form, it is also acceptable to form a groo periphery of the joint contact part of the supply joint Because any d the joint protruding part will be absorbed by this groove, it is pos displacement in the insertion direction of the joint contact part as t inserted Further by increasing the inner diameter of the joint c relation to the inner diameter of the joint protruding part, it is pos any transmission of the displacement of the joint protruding pa contact part
Also in the above example of embodiment, while a film 160 wa both sides of the first opening 112a and the second opening 112b of 110, it is acceptable to close one opening using the side wall, and to 160 onto only the other opening In this case, the second opening 112 by the side wall and by having the construction in which the film 1 the first opening 112a, it is possible to form a film 160 on the si ambient air connection passage 433, making it possible to reduce the meniscus on the ambient air connection passage 433 Also in the cas acceptable to apply a water resistant coating onto this nylon layer type of construction, it is possible to prevent the formation of a m ambient air connection passage 433
Also, in the above example of embodiment, the ambient air c passage forming part 430 was constructed such that it sloped down the second ambient air communicating chamber 432 from the firs communicating chamber 431, but because one surface of the communicating passage 433 is constructed of a film 160, it is possible formation of a meniscus within the ambient air communicating Therefore, it is acceptable to have a construction in which the communicating passage forming part 430 does not necessarily slop and it is acceptable to have a construction in which it is horizontal in the ink cartridge 14 is attached
Also, in the above example of embodiment while all of the wel were performed using ultrasonic welding, in the case that it is possi attachment using an adhesive, it is acceptable to make all attachm adhesive, and it is also acceptable to use a different welding method fo instance, the welding of the case 200 can be substituted with attach adhesive as it is only important to ensure that the first and second 210 and 220 do not separate Industrial Applicability
The ink cartridge and the system of the present invention are w home and office uses

Claims

1 An ink cartridge configured to be horizontally inserted i recording apparatus in a mounting direction, comprising an ink supplying part positioned on the front surface of the i the mounting direction for supplying ink from the ink cartridge recording apparatus and an irradiated part positioned on the front surface, wherein part is configured to be positioned between two portions of an optica ink jet recording apparatus and to be positioned above the ink suppl the ink cartridge is mounted to the ink jet recording apparatus, an irradiated part comprises a pair of opposing surfaces configured t portions of the optical sensor respectively and the opposing surfa substantially vertically when the ink cartridge is mounted to the in apparatus
2 The ink cartridge according to claim 1, wherein the pai surfaces are planes which are parallel to a line connecting the ink and the irradiated part
3 The ink cartridge according to claim 1 or 2 wherein said ink projects from the front surface and has an opening formed ther position farther frontward than the irradiated part in the mounting d
4 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 3, wherein part comprises a front surface which connects the pair of opposing su front surface of the irradiated part forms an angular corner with eac the opposing surfaces
5 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 4 where formed in the front surface of the ink cartridge and the irradiated par within the recess connected to the ink storing member and the front surface of the cartridge is formed by the casing w penetration opening through which a part of the ink supplying part second penetration opening for accommodating the irradiated part
9 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 8, furthe moving member disposed within an inner space of the irradiated par moving member is configured to move in response to a decrease in an in the ink cartridge
10 The ink cartridge according to claim 9, wherein the m comprises a light blocking member positioned at one end of the movin disposed within the inner space of the irradiated part? a floating member positioned at an opposite end of the moving a support member positioned between the light blocking me floating member, wherein the moving member is configured to rota support member in response to a decrease in the amount of ink in the
11 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 10 further atmosphere introducing part positioned on the front surface of the in positioned above the irradiated part when the ink cartridge is mou jet recording apparatus
12 The ink cartridge according to claim 11, further compris protruding portions positioned on the front surface of the ink protruding farther from the front surface of the ink cartridge than the part and farther than the atmosphere introducing part, wherein the part and the atmosphere introducing part are positioned between t portions /
13 A system comprising an ink cartridge and an ink jet recordi the ink cartridge comprising an ink supplying part configured to be connected with member* and an irradiated part configured to be positioned between the part and the light receiving part of the transmission optical sen positioned above the ink supplying part when the ink cartridge is accommodation member, wherein the irradiated part comprises a p surfaces configured to face the light emitting part and the light receiv optical sensor respectively and the opposing surfaces extending vertically when the ink cartridge is mounted to the accommodation m
14 The system according to claim 13 wherein the irradiated pa withm a recess formed in the front surface of the ink cartridge emitting part and the light receiving part are configured to project int sandwich the irradiated part when the ink cartridge is mo accommodation member
15 The system according to one of claims 13 or 14, wherein the o configured to detect the amount of ink in the ink cartridge
PCT/JP2006/319616 2005-09-29 2006-09-25 Ink cartridge, and system including ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus WO2007037449A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
HK08106943.7A HK1116451A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2008-06-23 Ink cartridge, and system including ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2005284646A JP4539517B2 (en) 2005-09-29 2005-09-29 ink cartridge
JP2005-284646 2005-09-29
JP2005-342697 2005-11-28
JP2005342697 2005-11-28
JP2005377987 2005-12-28
JP2005-377987 2005-12-28
JP2006064867A JP2007196650A (en) 2005-11-28 2006-03-09 Ink cartridge
JP2006-064867 2006-03-09
JP2006081806A JP4479684B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2006-03-23 ink cartridge
JP2006-081806 2006-03-23

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007037449A1 true WO2007037449A1 (en) 2007-04-05
WO2007037449A9 WO2007037449A9 (en) 2007-05-24

Family

ID=37744413

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2006/319616 WO2007037449A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-25 Ink cartridge, and system including ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1772269B2 (en)
AT (1) ATE413279T1 (en)
DE (2) DE602006003501D1 (en)
HK (1) HK1116451A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2007037449A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11230107B2 (en) 2016-07-27 2022-01-25 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Horizontal interface for fluid supply cartridge having digital fluid level sensor

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE202009003510U1 (en) 2009-03-15 2009-05-28 Leier, Rolf Container for holding a liquid
US11117382B2 (en) * 2017-02-28 2021-09-14 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid supplying device having tank and cartridge attachable thereto
JP6922256B2 (en) 2017-02-28 2021-08-18 ブラザー工業株式会社 Liquid supply device and image recording device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08281966A (en) * 1995-04-13 1996-10-29 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Ink jet recorder and residual ink detecting method
JPH09220817A (en) * 1996-02-19 1997-08-26 Sony Corp Ink jet recording device and ink cartridge
JP2005254734A (en) * 2004-03-15 2005-09-22 Brother Ind Ltd Ink cartridge and inkjet recording device

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6729711B1 (en) * 1993-05-26 2004-05-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Ink jet recording apparatus
US7249831B2 (en) * 1995-04-27 2007-07-31 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Ink container refurbishment system
JPH11157097A (en) 1997-11-26 1999-06-15 Seiko Epson Corp Ink cartridge, ink jet recorder mountable with the same, and method for controlling the recorder
US7350909B2 (en) 2004-03-04 2008-04-01 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Ink cartridge and inkjet printer

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08281966A (en) * 1995-04-13 1996-10-29 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Ink jet recorder and residual ink detecting method
JPH09220817A (en) * 1996-02-19 1997-08-26 Sony Corp Ink jet recording device and ink cartridge
JP2005254734A (en) * 2004-03-15 2005-09-22 Brother Ind Ltd Ink cartridge and inkjet recording device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11230107B2 (en) 2016-07-27 2022-01-25 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Horizontal interface for fluid supply cartridge having digital fluid level sensor

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
HK1116451A1 (en) 2008-12-24
ATE413279T1 (en) 2008-11-15
DE202006020421U1 (en) 2008-06-19
DE602006003501D1 (en) 2008-12-18
EP1772269B2 (en) 2016-12-28
EP1772269A2 (en) 2007-04-11
EP1772269B1 (en) 2008-11-05
EP1772269A3 (en) 2007-05-16
WO2007037449A9 (en) 2007-05-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2007037536A1 (en) Ink cartridge and method for replacing ink reservoir element in ink cartridge
WO2007037451A1 (en) Ink cartridge, ink jet recording system and set of ink cartridges
US8025376B2 (en) Ink cartridges
WO2007037548A1 (en) Ink cartridge, inkjet recording apparatus and combination thereof
US7810916B2 (en) Ink cartridges
WO2007037449A1 (en) Ink cartridge, and system including ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus
US7553007B2 (en) Ink cartridges
WO2007037528A1 (en) Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus
EP1772272B1 (en) Ink cartridge
WO2007037527A1 (en) Ink cartridge and printer
US7682004B2 (en) Ink cartridges
US7669994B2 (en) Ink cartridges
WO2007037445A1 (en) Unit of ink cartridges
WO2007037529A1 (en) Ink cartridge and ink-jet recording apparatus
EP2095962B1 (en) Ink cartridges

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200680006465.1

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 06810971

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1